2007 chevrolet malibu owner manual m - general motors …€¦ · 2007 chevrolet malibu owner...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 17Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 42Airbag System ........................................ 72Restraint System Check ......................... 90

Features and Controls ................................ 93Keys ....................................................... 95Doors and Locks .................................. 104Windows ............................................... 110Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 113Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 117Mirrors .................................................. 138OnStar® System ................................... 144

Universal Home Remote System .......... 148Storage Areas ...................................... 160Sunroof ................................................ 164

Instrument Panel ....................................... 165Instrument Panel Overview ................... 168Climate Controls ................................... 188Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 198Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 218Audio System(s) ................................... 228

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 287Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 288Towing ................................................. 330

2007 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 341Service ................................................. 344Fuel ...................................................... 346Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 352Bulb Replacement ................................ 389Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 394Tires ..................................................... 397Appearance Care .................................. 435Vehicle Identification ............................. 444Electrical System .................................. 445Capacities and Specifications ................ 454

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 457Maintenance Schedule .......................... 458

Customer Assistance Information ............. 475Customer Assistance and Information ..... 476Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 491

Index .......................................................... 495

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem,the MALIBU Emblem, and the names MALIBUand MALIBU MAXX are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than one

entertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without afront passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864103 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in differentcolors or in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Power Seat ................................................... 9Manual Lumbar ............................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 13Passenger Folding Seatback (Maxx) ............ 14Power Lift Seat ........................................... 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 17Rear Seat Operation ................................... 17

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 33Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 34Right Front Passenger Position ................... 34Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 34Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 37Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 41Safety Belt Extender ................................... 41

Child Restraints ............................................ 42Older Children ............................................. 42Infants and Young Children ......................... 45Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 56Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 65Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 67Airbag System .............................................. 72

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 74When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 78What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 79What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ... 80Passenger Sensing System ......................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 88Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 89Restraint System Check ............................... 90

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 91

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Power Seat

If the vehicle has apower seat, the controlused to operate it islocated on the outboardside of the driver’s seat.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the controlup or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the controlup or down.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the handle islocated on the outboardside of the seat.

Move the handle up repeatedly to decreaselumbar support. Move the handle down repeatedlyto increase lumbar support.

9

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated front seats.

The buttons are locatedon the outboard side ofthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s seats.

Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on.The seat will heat to the high setting. Theindicator light above the switch will be lit next tothe number 2.

Press the top of the switch again to go to the lowheat setting. The indicator light will be lit nextto the number 1.

Press the bottom of the switch to turn thefeature off.

The heated seat feature will turn off when theignition is turned off.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

10

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position,do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position. Release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its job becauseit will not be against your body. Instead, itwill be in front of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicleis in motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the restraint up toraise it. To lower thehead restraint, press thebutton, located on thetop of the seatback, andpush the restraint down.

The rear seat head restraints are also adjustable.

13

Passenger Folding Seatback (Maxx)Your vehicle may have a passenger foldingseatback. This feature allows for more cargo spaceor allows the seatback to be used as a temporarytable while the vehicle is stopped.

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 74 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 324.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn,or in a crash. Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the seatback forward, do the following:

1. Make sure the seatback is in the most uprightposition and locked by using the recliningseatback lever on the outboard side of the seat.See Reclining Seatbacks on page 10.

14

2. If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwithout a side impact airbag, press eitherlever located on the back of the seatback andfold the seatback forward.If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwith a side impact airbag, press the leverlocated on the back of the seatback onthe inboard side. Press the lever and fold theseatback forward.

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwithout a side impact airbag, press eitherlever located on the back of the seatback.Pull the seatback up to lock it into place.Make sure the safety belt is not twisted orcaught in the seatback.If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwith a side impact airbag, press the leverlocated on the back of the seatback on theinboard side. Pull the seatback up to lockit into place. Make sure the safety belt is nottwisted or caught in the seatback.

Seat without Side Impact Airbag shown,Seat with Side Impact Airbag similar

15

{CAUTION:


2. Push and pull the seatback to make sure it islocked into place.

3. Use the reclining seatback lever to adjustthe seatback to a comfortable position.See Reclining Seatbacks on page 10.

Power Lift SeatYour vehicle may have this feature. First move theseat forward or rearward to where you want it.See Manual Seats on page 8.

The power lift seat switch is located on theoutboard side of the driver’s seat. To raise orlower the seat, press the top or bottom ofthe switch.

16

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationFolding the SeatbackYour vehicle may has a split folding rear seatback.

To fold down the rear seatback on the sedan,do the following:

1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of thehandles located on the upper part of thetrunk opening. The driver’s side handle willopen the larger side of the seatback.The passenger’s side handle will open thesmaller side of the seatback.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Once a handle is pulled, the seatback can bepushed open through the trunk, or pulledopen from inside the vehicle.

17

To fold down the rear seatback on the MAXX,do the following:

1. Pull up on and hold the lever located on theside of either rear seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Once a lever is pulled, the seatback can bepushed into the down position.

{CAUTION:


18

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

To return the seatback to the upright position,push the seatback up until you hear a click.Then pull on the seatback to make sure it issecure.

Rear Sliding Seat (MAXX Only)If your vehicle is the MAXX model your rear seatwill slide forward or rearward to allow morecargo space in the rear.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat backand forth to be sure the seat is locked in place.

If your vehicle has the rear seat entertainmentsystem, slide the rear seat forward so that the frontedge of the seat cushion is lined up with themark on the carpet retainer trim on the floor of thedriver’s side rear seat. If the rear seat is forwardof the mark, you will not be able to open theDVD screen.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Light onpage 201.

20

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashescan be so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

21

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

22

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

23

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down.And your chance of being conscious duringand after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why shouldI have to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

24

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of lessthan 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 42 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 45. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

25

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment onpage 33.

26

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

27

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

28


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

29


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

30


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder atall times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

31


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

32

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down,push down the releasebutton (A) and movethe height adjusterto the desired position.You can move theheight adjuster up bypushing the releasebutton up.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it without pushing the releasebutton to make sure it has locked into position.

33

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.

For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective is wearing themproperly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens,let the belt go back all the way and start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And theycan strike others in the vehicle who are wearingsafety belts.

34

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

35

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

36

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfortguide positions the belt away from the neckand head.

Malibu SedanThere is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the rear seat.

Here is how to install a comfort guide to thesafety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

37

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic cord must be under the belt.Then, place the guide over the belt, and insertthe two edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

38

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 34. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide the guideonto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them between the seatback and theinterior body, leaving only the loop of the elasticcord exposed.

39

Malibu MAXXThere is a safety belt routing guide attached toeach outside passenger position in the rear seat ofthe Malibu MAXX. Here is how to use the safetybelt routing guide:

1. Slide the edge of the safety belt (D) throughthe opening at the top of the guide (B).

2. Adjust the safety belt so that it lies flat againstthe lower level (C) or the upper level (A) ofthe guide.Be sure the safety belt lies flat againstthe guide.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

3. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 34. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove the safety belt from the guide, slide theedge of the safety belt through the opening atthe top of the guide.

40

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, if yourvehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety beltsin a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 91.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. Whenyou go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you willwear, so the extender will be long enough foryou. To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it for securing childseats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

41

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

42

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 37. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safetybelt buckle. In either case, be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the child’s upper bodywould have the restraint that belts provide.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

44

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection!This includes infants and all other children.Neither the distance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes the need, foreveryone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United Statesand in every Canadian province says childrenup to some age must be restrained whilein a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

45

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby intheir arms while riding in a vehicle.A baby does not weigh much — untila crash. During a crash a baby willbecome so heavy it is not possible tohold it. For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) babywill suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg)force on a person’s arms. A baby shouldbe secured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant’s body,the back and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area thatis unprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious or fatalinjuries. Young children always should besecured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat canalso help a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint systemis a portable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,an add-on child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. With built-in or add-onchild restraints, the child has to be securedwithin the child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint,be sure the child restraint is designed tobe used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have alabel saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards. Then follow theinstructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itselfor in a booklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Makesure the child restraint is properlyinstalled in the vehicle using the vehicle’ssafety belt or LATCH system, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle.

Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56 for more information.A child can be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,and a crotch strap. A shield may take the placeof hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulderstraps that are attached to a flat pad whichrests low against the child’s body. A shelf- orarmrest-type shield has straps that are attachedto a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or tothe side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

53

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that children be securedin a rear seat, including: an infant or a child ridingin a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding ina forward-facing child seat; an older child ridingin a booster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place the child restraint,you may not be able to access certain safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.

54

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints

A. Child restraintusing LATCH

B. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Occupant prohibitedB. Child restraint

using LATCH

A. Child restraintusing LATCH

B. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

C. Child restraint usingsafety belt or LATCHor occupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

B. Child restraintusing LATCH

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

55

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicleand attachments on the child restraint thatare made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturerwill provide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

56

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints alsohave a top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

57

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachrear anchor positionhas a label, nearthe crease betweenthe seatback andthe seat cushion.

For sedan models, each rear seating positionhas exposed metal lower anchors in the creasebetween the seatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located onthe back of the rearseatback near the toptether anchors.

Rear Seat

MAXX Models

MAXX Models

58

For sedan models, the top tether anchors arelocated behind the rear seat on the filler panel.

For MAXX models, the top tether anchors arelocated on the back of the rear seatback. Be sureto use an anchor located on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Sedan MAXX

59

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 54for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

60

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restrainton page 54. Depending on where you placethe child restraint, you may not be able toaccess certain safety belt assemblies or LATCHanchors for additional passengers or childrestraints.

You cannot secure three child restraints usingthe LATCH anchors in the rear seat at the sametime, but you can install two of them. If you wantto do this, install one LATCH child restraint inthe passenger-side position, and install theother one either in the driver’s-side position orin the center position. Refer to the followingillustration to learn which anchors to use.

61

A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors

A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors

Make sure to attach the child restraint at theproper anchor location.

Sedan

MAXX

62

This system is designed to make installation ofchild restraints easier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Insteaduse the vehicle’s anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor tosecure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the position you are using has an

adjustable head restraint, raise it.See Head Restraints on page 13.

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the toptether according to your childrestraint instructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position youare using does nothave a head restraintand you are usinga single tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

63

If the position youare using does nothave a head restraintand you are usinga dual tether, routethe tether overthe seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether under the headrestraint and in betweenthe head restraintposts. See HeadRestraints on page 13.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a dual tetherroute the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts. SeeHead Restraints onpage 13.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

64

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

65

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

66

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 56.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 54.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 82 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 203 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

67


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child



restraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

68

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 56 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 82. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator should lightand stay lit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 203.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

69

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

70

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit andstay lit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

71

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver andanother frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have a seat-mountedside impact airbag for the driver and for the rightfront passenger. Your vehicle may also haveroof-mounted side impact airbags. Roof-mountedside impact airbags are available for the driverand the passenger seated directly behindthe driver and for the right front passenger and thepassenger seated directly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the side of the frontseatback closest to the door. If your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on theceiling near the side windows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt, even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.


72


Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deployin moderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflatein frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly, whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

73

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 45.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 202 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

74

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver, it is in the side of the driver’sseatback closest to the door.

75

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger, it is in the sideof the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is in the ceiling above theside windows.

76

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it is inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. If your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie-downthrough any door or window opening.If you do, the path of an inflating airbagwill be blocked. Do not let seat coversblock the inflation path of a side impactairbag. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear.

77

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which helps the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severefrontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into awall that does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph(29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level canvary, however, with specific vehicle design, so thatit can be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

78

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 72 for moreinformation. Side impact airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intendedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal airbags,inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and how quickly thevehicle slows down. For side impact airbags,inflation is determined by the location andseverity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontalairbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side window.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

79

Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags may stillbe at least partially inflated minutes after the vehiclecomes to rest. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag, the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest tothe door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped), and the garnish trim and the areaalong the ceiling of your vehicle near the sidewindows for the roof–mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) — may be hot for a short time. Theparts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming from the ventsin the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of the windshieldor being able to steer the vehicle, nor does itprevent people from leaving the vehicle.

80

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn the hazard warning flashers on whenthe airbags inflate. You can lock the doors,turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off again by using the controlsfor those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system. If you donot get them, the airbag system will not bethere to help protect you in another crash.A new system will include airbag modulesand possibly other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collectionand Event Data Recorders on page 486.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can meanthat the airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

81

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger’s position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when you startyour vehicle in the instrument panel.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, will be visible during the system check.If you are using remote start to start your vehiclefrom a distance, if equipped, you may not seethe system check. When the system checkis complete, either the word ON or the word OFF,or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, willbe visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 203.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in arear seat, including: an infant or a child riding ina rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child ridingin a booster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

United States Canada

82


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbagif the system detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and



no one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

83

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 203.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securinga Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 67.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.

84

Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 13.

Remove any additional material from the seatcushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designedto enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sitting properly in the rightfront passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag tobe enabled, the on indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in your vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor two to three minutes. This will allow thesystem to detect that person and then enable theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

85

Safety belts help keep the passenger in positionon the seat during vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passenger sensingsystem maintain the passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” inthe Index for additional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the airbag(s). See AirbagReadiness Light on page 202 for moreon this, including important safetyinformation.

86

A thick layer of additional material, such as ablanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensingsystem operates. You may want to consider notusing seat covers or other aftermarket equipment.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 89 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid soaks into theseat. If this happens, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator and the airbagreadiness light on the instrument panel will belit. The system should resume normal operationafter the seat is allowed to dry. If the systemoperates incorrectly after the seat has dried,have your dealer/retailer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

87

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You do notwant the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 492.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

88

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 476.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 476.

89

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors, and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 439for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the airbag covering on the driver’s andright front passenger’s seatback (if equipped),or the side impact airbag covering on thegarnish trim and ceiling near the side windows(if equipped), the airbag may not workproperly. You may have to replace the airbagmodule in the steering wheel, both theairbag module and the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s airbag, the airbagmodule and seatback for the driver’s andright front passenger’s seat-mounted sideimpact airbags (if equipped), or the sideimpact airbag module, garnish trim and ceilingcovering for the roof-mounted side impactairbags (if equipped). Do not open or breakthe airbag coverings.

90

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new beltsor LATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

91

If your seat adjuster will not work after a crash,the special part of the safety belt that goes throughthe seat to the adjuster may need to be replaced.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part about the airbagsystem earlier in this manual.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will need toreplace the driver’s and right front passengerssafety belt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so.Then the new retractor assembly will be thereto help protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 202.

92

Keys .............................................................. 95Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 97Doors and Locks ........................................ 104

Door Locks ................................................ 104Power Door Locks ..................................... 105Door Ajar Reminder .................................. 105Delayed Locking ........................................ 106Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 106Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 107Lockout Protection ..................................... 108Trunk (Sedan) ........................................... 108Liftgate (MAXX) ......................................... 110

Windows ...................................................... 110Power Windows ........................................ 111Sun Visors ................................................ 112

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 113Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 113PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 115PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 115

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 117New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 117Ignition Positions ....................................... 118Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 119Starting the Engine .................................... 120Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 121Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 122Automatic Transaxle Operation

(Base Models) ........................................ 124Automatic Transaxle Operation

(SS Models) ........................................... 128Parking Brake ........................................... 132Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 132Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 134Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 135Engine Exhaust ......................................... 136Running the Engine While Parked ............. 137

Section 2 Features and Controls

93

Mirrors ......................................................... 138Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 138Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 138Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 139Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with Compass ........................................ 141Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 143Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................... 143Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 144

OnStar® System .......................................... 144Universal Home Remote System ................ 148

System Identification .................................. 148Universal Home Remote System ............... 149Universal Home Remote System Operation

(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 149Universal Home Remote System Operation

(With Three Round LED) ......................... 153

Storage Areas ............................................. 160Glove Box ................................................. 160Cupholder(s) .............................................. 160Center Console Storage Area .................... 160Map Pocket ............................................... 161Rear Compartment Storage

Panel/Cover (MAXX) .............................. 161Table (MAXX) ........................................... 163Convenience Net ....................................... 163

Sunroof ....................................................... 164

Section 2 Features and Controls

94

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

95

One key is used for theignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the key has abar-coded key tag. This tag may be removedby your dealer/retailer before it is delivered.Each tag has a key code on it that tells yourdealer/retailer or a qualified locksmith how tomake extra keys. Keep the tag in a safe place.If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to haveone made easily using this tag. If you need anew key, go to your dealer/retailer for the correctkey code. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 481 for more information.Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



96

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range.This is normal for any RKE system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacementis necessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 97.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors may be locked and unlocked,and the trunk or liftgate may be opened fromabout 3 feet (1 m) up to 197 feet (60 m) awaywith the remote keyless entry transmitter. If yourvehicle has the remote vehicle start feature,you can also start the vehicle’s engine with theremote keyless entry transmitter.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

97

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, the engine may be started fromoutside the vehicle using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” later inthis section for more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. The interior lamps will turn off after all of thedoors are closed. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the remote lock feedbackcan be programmed to have the horn chirpand/or the parking lamps flash when the remotekeyless entry transmitter is used to lock thevehicle’s doors. See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHTFLASH” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 225 for more information.

Pressing the lock button may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 113.

K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlockthe driver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors, and theliftgate will unlock. The interior lamps will turnon and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignitionis turned on. If enabled through the DIC, theremote unlock feedback can be programmed tohave the horn chirp and/or the parking lamps flashwhen the remote keyless entry transmitter isused to unlock the vehicle’s doors. See “UNLOCKHORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 225 for more information.

If enabled through the DIC, and it is darkenough outside, the vehicle’s high-beamheadlamps, parking lamps, and back-up lampswill turn on each time the unlock button onthe transmitter is pressed. These exterior lampswill stay on for 20 seconds, or until a door isopened. See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 225.

Pressing the unlock button will disarm thecontent theft-deterrent system, if equipped.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 113.

98

V (Remote Trunk/Liftgate Release): Thetrunk or liftgate will open when this button onthe transmitter is pressed and held for aboutone second. You can open the sedan trunk orthe liftgate on the MAXX when the vehicleis in PARK (P) or when the ignition is off.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): This buttonmay be used to locate your vehicle. Press andrelease this button to initiate vehicle locate. Thehorn will sound three times and the headlampsand parking lamps will flash three times. Pressand hold the button for about three seconds toinitiate the panic alarm. The horn will sound andthe headlamps and parking lamps will flash for30 seconds. Press the button again to cancel thepanic alarm.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is codedto prevent another transmitter from unlockingyour vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen,a replacement can be purchased through yourGM dealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutfour years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

99

The KEY FOB BATT LOW message in thevehicle’s DIC will display if the remote keylessentry transmitter battery is low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Static fromyour body transferred to these surfaces maydamage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:

1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into thenotch located below the vehicle locator/panicalarm button, and separate the bottomhalf from the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive (+) side ofthe battery faces up. Use one three-volt,CR2032, or equivalent type battery.

3. Put the two halves back together. Make surethe cover is on tight, so water will not getinside the transmitter.

4. Test the operation of the transmitter withthe vehicle.

100

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote start feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle. It may also start thevehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems andrear window defogger. When the remote startsystem is active and the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, it may automaticallyregulate the inside temperature. Normal operationof the system will return after the key is turnedto ON. See Automatic Climate Control System onpage 192 for additional information.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts, each with 10 minutes of engine running time.

The remote vehicle start feature needs to be resetafter your vehicle’s engine is started two timesusing the transmitter’s remote start button.The remote start system is reset by inserting thevehicle’s key into the ignition switch and turning itto ON. See Ignition Positions on page 118 forinformation regarding the ignition positions onyour vehicle.

You can start your vehicle’s engine from about197 feet (60 m) away. However, the range may beless while the vehicle is running, and as a resultyou may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn itoff than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which may affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 96.

101

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the keyless entry transmitter willhave a button with this symbol on it.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lights flash.When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the engineis running.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehiclehas been driven, repeat these steps, whilethe engine is still running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes. Remote startcan be extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start,insert and turn the key to ON to drive the vehicle.

If the remote start procedure is used againbefore the first 10 minute time frame has ended,the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and thesecond 10 minute time frame will start.

The engine will shut off automatically after10 minutes, unless a time extension has beendone, or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to ON.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing. The parking lamps will turn off.

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at thevehicle, and press the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch to ON and then to OFF.

102

The remote vehicle start feature will not operateif any of the following occur:

• The remote start system is disabledthrough the DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 212.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have alreadybeen provided.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle startfeature are shipped from the factory with theremote vehicle start system enabled. The systemmay be enabled or disabled through the DIC.See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 225 for additionalinformation.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it will have the remote start readyfeature. This feature allows your dealer to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.

If the keyless entry transmitter has a plus (+)symbol on the back cover, your vehicle has theremote start ready feature. You can lock or unlockyour vehicle from about 197 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

103

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children,

can easily open the doors and fall outof a moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extreme



heat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or remote keylessentry transmitter, if equipped. Turn the keycounterclockwise to unlock the door.

From the inside, lock and unlock the door bymoving the manual lock knob down and up,or by using the power door lock switches.

104

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s door.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors andliftgate, if equipped. Press the bottom of theswitch to lock all doors and liftgate, if equipped.

The rear doors do not have power door lockswitches. Rear seat passengers must usethe manual lock knob on their doors.

Door Ajar ReminderIf one of the doors is not fully closed while theignition is on and the shift lever is moved out ofPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:

• A chime will sound.

• The DOOR AJAR message will displaythrough the Driver Information Center (DIC)until the door is closed. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 222.

105

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver to delay the locking ofthe vehicle. It will not operate with the key in theignition. See Lockout Protection on page 108.

Press the driver’s power door lock switch or theremote keyless entry transmitter lock button once.With the key removed from the ignition and thedriver’s door open, the following will occur:

• Three chimes will sound to signal the delay.

• All doors will lock and the turn signals will flashonce five seconds after the last door has beenclosed.

• The horn will chirp if the horn chirp feature isenabled. See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 225.

If a door is opened before the five seconds haselapsed, the doors will not lock until five secondsafter all doors are closed.

If the power door lock switch or the transmitterlock button is pressed twice when leavingthe vehicle, the doors will lock immediately.

If the power door unlock switch or the transmitterunlock button is pressed, the doors will unlockimmediately and not lock automatically afterthe doors are closed.

This feature is turned on at the factory but maybe turned off through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock alldoors automatically when the following are met:

• All doors are closed.

• The ignition is on.

• The shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).

This feature cannot be disabled.

When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P),all doors will unlock.

If someone needs to exit the vehicle once thedoors are locked, have that person use the manuallock knob or power door unlock switch.

106

The power door unlock function can beprogrammed through prompts displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC). Theseprompts allow you to choose unlock settings.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 225.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks.These prevent passengers from opening therear doors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located onthe inside edge of eachrear door. You mustopen the rear doorsto access them.The label showing lockand unlock positionsis located near the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one,the power door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Security Lock Labelshown

107

Lockout ProtectionThis feature prevents the driver’s door from beinglocked using the power door locks, if the key isleft in the ignition and a door is open.

Pressing the power door lock switch will lock allthe doors and then unlock the driver’s door.

Pressing and holding the power door lock switchfor more than three seconds will override thisfeature.

If you remove the key from the ignition, or if youuse the manual door lock or the remote keylessentry transmitter, you could still lock your keyinside your vehicle. Always remember to takeyour key with you.

Trunk (Sedan)To unlock the trunk from the outside, use thekey or the remote keyless entry transmitter.When closing the trunk, close from the centerto ensure it fully latches.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 136.

108

Remote Trunk/Liftgate Release

Press the remoterelease button, locatedon the lower edgeof the driver’s door,to open the trunk lidor the liftgate.

You can open the trunk lid on the sedan or theliftgate on the MAXX only while the vehicleis in PARK (P) or the ignition is off.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk of the sedanmodel on the trunk latch. This handle will glowfollowing exposure to light. Pull the release handleup to open the trunk from the inside.

109

Liftgate (MAXX)To open the liftgate, press the trunk/liftgate buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter or theremote trunk/liftgate release button located on thelower edge of the driver’s door. See “RemoteTrunk/Liftgate Release” under Trunk (Sedan)on page 108.

If the liftgate is unlocked, you can manually open itby pressing the touchpad located on the undersideof the liftgate trim panel, to the right of center.

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.



Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

110

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.



The windows will function with the keys inthe ignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

The power windowswitches are locatedon the armrest on thedriver’s door. In addition,each passenger doorhas a switch for itsown window.

111

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window also has an express-downfeature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Pressthe front of the switch part way, and the driver’swindow will open a small amount. If the front of theswitch is pressed all the way down and released,the window will go all the way down automatically.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull thefront of the switch momentarily. To raise thewindow, pull and hold the front of the switch.

Window LockoutThe driver’s power window controls also include alockout button.

o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout buttonto stop the rear passengers from using theirwindow switches. The driver and front passengercan still operate all the windows with the lockon. When the red part of the switch is visible youhave returned to normal window operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down thevisors. You can also remove them from the centermount and swing them to the side, to block outglare from the side. The visors also haveextenders that can be pulled out.

Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrorslocated on the passenger and driver’s sidevisor. When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.

112

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may havea content theft-deterrentalarm system.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, you can arm the system bydoing any one of the following:

• Press the remote keyless entry transmitterlock button.

• Press the power door lock switch while thedriver’s door is open.

The system will arm either:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors and theliftgate (MAXX) are closed.

• Sixty seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter a second time while all thedoors and liftgate are closed, the system willarm immediately. The system will still armin sixty seconds if a door or liftgate is open.When the opened door or liftgate is closed,it will also become armed.

The security light, located on the instrumentpanel cluster, will turn on to indicate that arminghas been initiated. Once the system is armed, thesecurity light will flash once every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door or the liftgate is open.

If you do not want to arm the system, you maylock the car with the lock knob on the doors.

113

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one ofthe following:

• Press the remote keyless entry transmitterunlock button.

• Turn the ignition on.

• Turn the driver’s door key lock cylindercounterclockwise.

Once the system is disarmed, the security lightwill stop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf the system is armed, it can be activatedby either:

• Opening the driver’s door or liftgate(MAXX model). This will cause aten second pre-alarm chirp followed by athirty second full alarm of horn and lights.

• Opening any other door. This will immediatelycause a full alarm of horn and lights forthirty seconds.

When an alarm event has finished, the systemwill re-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. The system will thenre-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. This will also disarm thesystem.

• Insert the key in the driver’s door key lockcylinder and turn it counterclockwise.This will also disarm the system.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.This will also disarm the system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press theunlock or lock buttons on the remote keylessentry transmitter, it means that the content theftsecurity system alarm was triggered previously.

114

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches adecoder in your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is apassive theft-deterrent system. This means youdon’t have to do anything special to arm ordisarm the system. It works when you insert orremove the key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it shuts downthe vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starterwill not work and fuel will stop flowing to theengine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method tostart the vehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical key codes.

115

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light comes on, thekey may have a damaged transponder. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses on page 446. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key, your vehicleneeds service. If your vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made. In an emergency, contact ChevroletRoadside Assistance. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 481 for more information.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a newor replacement key. Up to 10 additional keys maybe programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your GM dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blankthat is cut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has “+” stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key tooff, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turnit to on within five seconds of removing theoriginal key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed. It may not beapparent that the security light went on due tohow quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

116

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly andmust be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle isnot protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system atthis time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your GM dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform betterin the long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See Towing a Trailer on page 333 forthe trailer towing capabilities of yourvehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and loadcan be gradually increased.

117

Ignition Positions

With the key in theignition switch, you canturn it to four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is in allthe way. If none of this works, then your vehicleneeds service.

9 (OFF): This is the only position from whichyou can remove the key. It also locks the ignitionand transaxle. A warning chime sounds if thedriver’s door is opened while the ignition is off andthe key is left in the ignition.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position lets you usethings like the radio and windshield wiperswhile the engine is not running.

Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed ortowed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 330.

R (ON): This position unlocks the ignition.It is also the position to where the key returns afteryou release the switch and the engine starts.The switch will stay in this position while theengine is running. But even while the engine is notrunning, you can use ON to operate the electricalaccessories, and to display some instrumentpanel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or ON position with the engine off.You might not be able to start your vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to the ON positionfor normal driving.

118

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime sounds, when the driver’s door isopened. Always remember to remove the key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This locks yourignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if the key is left inthe ignition while your vehicle is parked. You mightnot be able to start your vehicle after it hasbeen parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

• Heated Seats (if equipped)

• Sunroof (if equipped)

These features continue to work up to 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned to OFF.

The power windows, heated seats, and sunroofwill work until any door is opened.

The radio continues to work until the driver’s dooris opened.

All these features operate when the key is in theON or ACC.

119

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal,

turn the ignition key to START. When theengine starts, let go of the key. The idlespeed will go down as your engine gets warm.Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transaxlegently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components. Ifthe ignition key is turned to the START position,and then released when the engine beginscranking, the engine will continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehicle starts. If theengine does not start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

120

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there as youhold the key in START for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts, let go of thekey and accelerator. If the vehicle starts brieflybut then stops again, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transaxlegently until the oil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer/retailer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.This feature is designed for shorter drivers, sincethe pedals cannot move farther away from thestandard position, but can move rearwardfor better pedal reach.

The ignition must be off or the vehicle in PARK (P)for this feature to work. The feature will not workif your foot is pushing on the throttle or brakepedal. Remove your foot from the pedalsand press the switch again.

The switch used toadjust the pedalsis located on theleft side of theinstrument panel.

121

To use your adjustable throttle and brake pedalfeature, do the following:

The adjustable pedal feature is meant to be usedwith the adjustable seat and adjustable steeringwheel controls to reach a safe and comfortableposition.

1. Adjust your seat to a comfortable positionwhere you can comfortably reach othercontrols such as the radio and climatecontrols.

2. Adjust the throttle and brake pedals to reacha comfortable and safe operating position.

3. Adjust the steering wheel to a safe operatingposition.

Engine Coolant HeaterIn very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater, if your vehicle has thisfeature, can help. You will get easier startingand lower fuel usage during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged ina minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

122

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. On the 2.2L engine, the enginecoolant heater cord is located near the aircleaner box on the passenger’s side ofthe engine compartment. On the 3.5L and3.9L V6 engines, the engine coolant heatercord is located on the driver’s side around thebattery box. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 354 for more informationon location.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.



You could be seriously injured. Plug thecord into a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer/retailer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

123

Automatic Transaxle Operation(Base Models)

Your automatictransaxle has a shiftlever located onthe console betweenthe seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 132. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 333.

124

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. Youmust fully apply your regular brake first andthen press the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON.If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever, then push the shiftlever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 134.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 322.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is runningat high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is runningat high speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not runningat high speeds when shifting your vehicle.

125

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in LOW (L2) when you are driving lessthan 35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

LOW (L): This position gives you access toFOURTH, THIRD, SECOND and FIRST gearranges. This provides more engine brakingbut lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D). Youcan use it on very steep hills, or in deep snowor mud. If the electronic range select is putin LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into lowergears until the vehicle is going slow enough.

126

Electronic Range Select Mode

This feature allows youto limit higher gears byselecting a maximumgear range whenthe shift lever is inLOW (L). The buttonfor this mode is locatedon the left of theshift lever knob.

When the shift lever is first moved into LOW (L),the display in the instrument panel shows L3.Press the minus (−) end of the button on the shiftlever once for L2 and once more for L1. Pressthe plus (+) end of the button once each to returnto L2, L3 and L4. The shift lever must be movedback to DRIVE (D) to turn off the electronic rangeselect mode.

L4 (LOW 4): This position does not limit gears,but provides more engine braking, and lowerfuel economy, than DRIVE (D). The actual gear isdetermined by throttle and vehicle speed.

L3 (LOW 3/DRIVE 3): This position preventsfourth gear operation. Actual gear is determinedby throttle and vehicle speed.

L2 (LOW 2/DRIVE 2): This position preventsthird and fourth gear operation. Actual gearis determined by throttle and vehicle speed. If youshift from L3 to L2 at vehicle speeds exceeding80 mph (110 km/h), the transaxle will not shift intoL2 gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.

L1 (LOW 1/DRIVE 1): This position prevents L2,L3, and L4 gear operation. If you shift from L2to the L1 position at vehicle speeds exceeding40 mph (65 km/h), the transaxle will not shift intoL1 gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.

127

Automatic Transaxle Operation(SS Models)

Your automatictransaxle has ashift lever locatedon the consolebetween the seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 132.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 333.

128

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brake first andpress the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) while the ignition key is inON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P)on page 134.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 322.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is runningat high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is runningat high speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not runningat high speeds when shifting your vehicle.

129

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

MANUAL MODE (M): This position, allows youto change gears similar to a manual transaxle.If your vehicle has this feature, see DriverShift Control (DSC).

Driver Shift Control (DSC)This feature allows you to select lower or higherdriving gears when the shift lever is in MANUALMODE (M). The button for this mode is locatedon the left side of the shift lever knob.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) rearwardinto the MANUAL MODE (M). The vehicle willbe in the MANUAL MODE (M) and a gearbased on the current driving speed.While driving in MANUAL MODE (M), thetransaxle will remain in the selected drivegear unless:

• A shift is required to protect the engine ortransaxle or,

• The vehicle slows almost to a stop(the vehicle will automatically downshift)

2. Press the plus (+) button to upshift or theminus (−) button to downshift.

130

When the shift lever is first moved into MANUALMODE (M), the display on the instrument panelcluster shows M1, M2, M3, M4. Position M for themanual mode and a number representing thegear the transaxle is in. Press the minus (−) endof the button on the shift lever to downshift.Press the plus (+) end of the button to upshift.The shift lever must be moved back to DRIVE (D)to turn off the manual mode and return to fullyautomatic shifting.

While using the Driver Shift Control (DSC) featurethe vehicle will have firmer shifting and increasedperformance. You can use this for sport drivingor when climbing hills to stay in gear longer or todownshift for more power or engine braking.

The transaxle will only allow you to shift into gearsappropriate for the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (RPM). The transaxle willnot automatically shift to the next higher gear if theengine RPM is too high.

When coming to a stop in the manual mode, thevehicle will automatically downshift to the propergear based on speed. Upon acceleration you willneed to manually upshift to the desired gear.

Second Gear Start FeatureWhen accelerating your vehicle from a stop insnowy and icy conditions, you may want to shiftthe gear select tap switch into Second gear.A higher gear allows you to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.

With the DSC feature, the vehicle can be set topull away in Second gear.

1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) into theMANUAL MODE (M).

2. With the vehicle stopped, press (+) end of thebutton to select Second gear. The vehicle willstart from a stop position in Second gear.

3. Once moving select the desired drive gear.

131

Parking Brake

To set the parkingbrake, push down theparking brake pedal withyour left foot. If theignition is on, the brakesystem warning lightwill come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 206.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot. Push downmomentarily on the parking brake pedal withyour left foot until you feel the pedal release.If the parking brake is not released whenyou begin to drive, the brake system warninglight comes on and a chime sounds as a warningthat the parking brake is still on.

The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will alsodisplay in the Driver Information Center (DIC)as a reminder to release the parking brake.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 222.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 333.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.


132


To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 333.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressingthe button on the shift lever while pushing theshift lever all the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and the parking brake is firmly set before leavingit. After moving the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see ifyou can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the shift lever button.

If you can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked in PARK (P).

133

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift thetransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle can put too much force on the parkingpawl in the transaxle. It could be difficult to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, setthe parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To findout how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 132.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you might need to haveanother vehicle push your vehicle a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, this should let you pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shiftlock control system. You have to apply yourregular brake first and then press the shift leverbutton before you can shift from PARK (P).See Automatic Transaxle Operation (Base Models)on page 124 or Automatic Transaxle Operation(SS Models) on page 128.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into the gear you wish.

134

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

135

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

136

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. Butif you ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 136.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place thiscan happen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER parkin a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 317.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 132.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pullinga trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 333.

137

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorThis mirror can be adjusted two ways. First, toadjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirrorto a position that allows you to see out of theback window. To adjust the height of the mirror,adjust the support that connects the mirror tothe windshield.

To reduce glare from lights behind you, movethe lever toward you to the night position.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

If your vehicle has this feature, this mirror has aknob located at the bottom of the mirror. It is usedto change the mirror from day to night position.To reduce glare from headlamps behind you whiledriving at night, rotate the knob clockwise. Fordaytime driving, turn the knob counterclockwise.

There are also three OnStar® buttons locatedat the bottom of the mirror face. See your dealerfor more information on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® Systemon page 144 for more information about theservices OnStar® provides.

138

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and OnStar®

controls. For more information about OnStar®,see OnStar® System on page 144.

The automatic dimming feature turns on each timethe vehicle is started. To turn automatic dimmingoff or on, press the left button below the mirror.A green indicator light will be on when automaticdimming is on.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailerfor more information on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® Systemon page 144 for more information about theservice OnStar® provides.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not showa compass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C appearsin the compass window, the compass may needto be reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

139

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass varianceif the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustthe compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until azone number appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

140

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass. This featureenables the mirror to sense nighttime glarefrom vehicle headlamps from behind andautomatically dim to reduce the glare to asafe level. The automatic dimming featureturns on each time the vehicle is started.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for theautomatic dimming feature.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turnedon automatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, dothe following:

1. Make sure the green indicator light, locatedto the left of the on/off button, is on. If it’snot, press the on/off button until the greenlight comes on, indicating that the mirror isin automatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing the on/off button until the greenindicator light turns off.

Compass Operation

Y: This is the on/off button for the compassfeature.

Press this button once to turn the compass onor off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxesfor a few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not showa compass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C or CALappears in the compass window, the compassmay need to be reset or calibrated.

141

To calibrate the compass, do the following:

• Make sure CAL is displayed in the display.If CAL is not displayed, press and hold thecompass button until CAL is displayed.

• Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h)or less until the display reads a direction.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass varianceif the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustthe compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the compass button until aZ and a zone number appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the compass button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C or CAL appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

142

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Use the selector switch located below the four-waycontrol panel to choose either the left or rightoutside mirror. Then press any of the four arrowslocated on the control pad to move each mirrorin the desired direction.

Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of yourvehicle and the area beside and behind yourvehicle.

Outside Power Heated MirrorsIf the vehicle has this feature, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, the heated driver’sand passenger’s outside power mirrors arewarmed to help clear them of ice, snow andcondensation. See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control System on page 188 for moreinformation. Also see Outside Power Mirrorson page 143 for mirror operation.

143

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharplyinto the right lane, you could hit a vehicleon your right. Check your inside mirroror glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things,like other vehicles, look farther away than theyreally are.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

144

OnStar® service is provided to you subject tothe OnStar® Terms and Conditions. Youmay cancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar® as provided below. A completeOnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Termsand Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. Formore information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide inyour glove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.

For more information, press the OnStar® button tospeak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services withSafe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic CrashNotification (AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

145

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling isfully integrated into the vehicle, and can beused with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or aBell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to theOnStar® Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, orspeak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing theOnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Three Spoke) on page 282 or Audio SteeringWheel Controls (Four Spoke) on page 283for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be usedto dial numbers into voicemail systems, or todial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

146

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service inthat area. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that area hascoverage, network capacity and reception whenthe service is needed, and technology that is

compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularlyin remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by your dealer/retailer. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

147

Universal Home RemoteSystem

System IdentificationYour vehicle may have a Universal HomeRemote System.

Determine which Universal Home Remote yourvehicle has and then read the pages following forinstructions on programming your specific system.

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions underUniversal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED).

If there are three round LED indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED).

For help or information on the Universal HomeRemote System, call the customer assistancephone number under Customer Assistance Officeson page 479.

148

Universal Home Remote SystemThe Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)indicator light above the Universal Home Remotebuttons, follow the instructions below.

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8to complete the programming of your UniversalHome Remote Transmitter.

149

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpfulto have another person available to assist youin the programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is also recommendedthat upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in section.

When programming a garage door, it is advisedto park outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orgate operator you are programming.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Programming the Universal HomeRemote SystemFollow these steps to program up to three devices:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttonsfor longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away fromthe Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light in view.

3. At the same time, press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote button andthe hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

150

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase allof the programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage dooropener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usuallybe found where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same button asecond time for two seconds, then release it.Immediately, press and hold the same button athird time for two seconds, then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.”You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this willerase all previous programming from theUniversal Home Remote buttons.

151

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signalis being transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

152

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step 2under “Programming Universal Home Remote”shown earlier in this section.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there are three round LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automation devices.

Do not use this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

153

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for Fixed Codeprogramming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

When programming a garage door, it is advisedto park outside of the garage. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of the garage dooror security device you are programming.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeMost garage door openers sold after 1996 areRolling Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you will haveto repeat the procedure.

154

Follow these steps to program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press thetwo outside buttons at the same timefor one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. It can usually be foundwhere the hanging antenna wire is attached tothe motor-head unit and may be a coloredbutton. Press this button. After you press thisbutton, you will have 30 seconds to completethe following steps.

155

3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press andhold the universal home remote button thatyou would like to use to control the garagedoor until the garage door moves. Theindicator light, above the selected button,should slowly blink. You may need to holdthe button from five to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second, releasethe button when the garage door moves.The indicator light will blink rapidly untilprogramming is complete.

5. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device suchas an additional garage door opener, a securitydevice, or home automation device, repeatSteps 1-5, choosing a different function buttonin Step 3 than what you used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work, you probablyhave a Fixed Code garage door opener. Followthe Programming instructions below for aFixed Code garage door opener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeMost garage door openers sold before 1996 areFixed Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you willhave to repeat the procedure.

156

Follow these steps to program up to three devices:

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garagedoor opener, remove the battery cover onyour hand held transmitter supplied bythe manufacturer of your garage door openermotor. If you see a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, you have aFixed Code garage door opener. If you donot see a row of dip switches, return tothe previous section for ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote – Rolling Code.

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions

157

Your panel of switches may not appearexactly as they do in the examples above,but they should be similar.The switch positions on your hand-heldtransmitter may be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position may be labeledas “Up,” “+,” or “On.”

• A switch in the down position may belabeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position may belabeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settingsfrom left to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position,write “Left.”

• When a switch is in the down position,write “Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up anddown position, write “Middle.”The switch settings that you wrote down inStep 2 will now become the button strokesyou enter into the Universal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter the switch settingsthat you wrote down in Step 2, in order fromleft to right, into the Universal Home Remote,when completing Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly pressall three buttons at the same time forabout three seconds. Release the buttonsto put the Universal Home Remote intoprogramming mode.

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

158

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter eachswitch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’sUniversal Home Remote. You will havetwo and one-half minutes to complete Step 4.Now press one button on the Universal HomeRemote for each switch setting as follows:

• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button inthe vehicle.

• If you wrote “Right,” press the right buttonin the vehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middlebutton in the vehicle.

5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,firmly press and release all three buttons at thesame time. The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,choosing a different button in Step 6 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

159

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttonsby repeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttonswhen you sell or terminate your lease.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Codeon the Universal Home Remote device,do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbuttons will be erased.


Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open, pull the handle down and pull the glovebox door down until it stops and is fully open.

Cupholder(s)There is a cupholder next to the shift lever andanother, if equipped, at the rear of the shift lever.

If your vehicle has rear seat cupholders, pulldown the door on the back of the center consoleto access them.

Center Console Storage AreaThere is a storage compartment in the centerconsole area. To open the lower compartment,pull up on the release at the front edge ofthe armrest. Your vehicle may have an accessorypower outlet inside of the storage area. SeeAccessory Power Outlet(s) on page 186 formore information.

160

Map PocketYour vehicle may have storage pockets locatedon the door panels or the back of the front seats.

Rear Compartment StoragePanel/Cover (MAXX)Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargocover feature. The panel/cargo cover can beadjusted into three positions.

To use the panel in the lower position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel intothe lower guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel.

161

The panel can be used in this position if you needadditional space above the panel. Place thecargo on top of the panel in this position.

{CAUTION:

If you were to carry things on theadjustable panel when it is in the upper(cargo cover) or center positions, duringa sudden vehicle movement or a crash,those things could be thrown aroundin the vehicle. You or others could beinjured. When it is in the upper or centerposition, always secure any cargo onthe floor beneath the panel/cover.

To use the panel in the center position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel intothe middle guides.



To use the panel in the upper position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel intothe upper guides.



This can be used as a cargo cover for the reararea. The panel may be installed either carpet orplastic side up. The panel may also be usedas a table in this position. See “Table” followingfor more information.

162

Table (MAXX)Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel thatalso functions as a table. The maximum loadfor the table is 100 lbs distributed (45 kg).

To set up the table, do the following:

1. Place the front corners into the rearupper guides.

2. Unlatch the fastener to release the legfrom the plastic side of the table and turnthe leg outward.

3. Set the table leg securely onto the liftgatelock striker at the rear edge of the vehicle.

Notice: Driving with the panel extended intothe table position could damage your vehicle.Always have the panel in the stored positionwhile you are driving.

Notice: Placing hot items on the surface ofthe table could damage it. Always be sure thatthe items that are placed on the surface ofthe table are of moderate temperature.

Hooks are located on the table to hang items.

Convenience NetYou may have a convenience net in the rear ofyour vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocerybags, in place during sharp turns or quick stopsand starts.

The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.

You can unhook the net so that it will lie flatwhen you are not using it.

163

Sunroof

If the vehicle has asunroof, the switch tooperate it is locatedon the overheadconsole betweenthe sun visors.

The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionis in ACC or ON, or while retained accessorypower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 119 for more information.

The sunroof can be opened to a vent positionor it can be express-opened all of the way.

To open the sunroof to the vent position,push the rear of the switch and release it.Push and release the rear of the switch againto fully open the sunroof.

The vent and open positions can be adjusted fordriving comfort by pushing and holding the frontof the switch until the sunroof moves to the desiredposition.

A deflector will automatically pop up when thesunroof is opened. The deflector will retractwhen the sunroof is closed.

To close the sunroof, push the front of theswitch and hold it until the sunroof is closed.The sunroof will stop if the switch is releasedduring operation. Remember to close thesunshade by hand.

The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forwardof the sliding glass panel, damage will occurand the sunroof may not open or closeproperly. Always close the glass panel beforeclosing the sunshade.

164

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 168Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 170Other Warning Devices ............................. 170Horn .......................................................... 170Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ............ 170Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 171Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 172Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 172Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 173Windshield Wipers ..................................... 173Windshield Washer .................................... 174Rear Window Wiper/Washer

(MAXX Model) ....................................... 175Cruise Control ........................................... 176Exterior Lamps .......................................... 179Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 181Headlamps Off in PARK (P) ...................... 181Delayed Headlamps .................................. 182Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 182Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 183Fog Lamps ................................................ 184Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 184Dome Lamp .............................................. 184Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 185

Parade Dimming ........................................ 185Front Reading Lamps ................................ 185Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 185Trunk Lamp ............................................... 185Cargo Lamp .............................................. 186Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 186Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 186Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 187

Climate Controls ......................................... 188Climate Control System ............................. 188Automatic Climate Control System ............. 192Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 197

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 198Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 198Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 200Trip Odometer ........................................... 200Tachometer ............................................... 201Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 201Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 202Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 202Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 203Charging System Light .............................. 206Brake System Warning Light ..................... 206Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 208

Section 3 Instrument Panel

165

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light ........................................ 209

Traction Control System Active Light ......... 209Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .... 210Enhanced Traction System Active Light ....... 210Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 211Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 211Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 212Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 215Security Light ............................................ 216Cruise Control Light .................................. 216Highbeam On Light ................................... 216Fuel Gage ................................................. 217

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 218DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 218DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 222DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 225

Audio System(s) ......................................... 228Setting the Time for Radios without

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................... 229Setting the Time for Radios with

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................... 230

Radio with CD (Base Level) ...................... 230Radio with CD (Uplevel) ............................ 236Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 246XM Radio Messages ................................. 259Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 261Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(Without Entertainment System) ............. 278Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(With Entertainment System) .................. 280Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 281Audio Steering Wheel Controls

(Three Spoke) ........................................ 282Audio Steering Wheel Controls

(Four Spoke) .......................................... 283Radio Reception ........................................ 284Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 285Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 285Fixed Mast Antenna (MAXX Only) ............. 285Backglass Antenna (Sedan Only) .............. 286XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 286

Section 3 Instrument Panel

166

✍ NOTES

167

Instrument Panel Overview

168

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate ControlSystem on page 188.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 171.

C. Cruise Controls (If Equipped). See CruiseControl on page 176.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 198.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. SeeWindshield Wipers on page 173.

F. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positionson page 118.

G. Hazard Warning Flasher. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 170.

H. Passenger Sensing System. See PassengerSensing System on page 82.

I. Center Air Outlets. See Climate ControlSystem on page 188.

J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 228.

K. Climate Control System. See ClimateControl System on page 188.

L. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 160.M. Side Air Outlets. See Climate Control

System on page 188.N. Adjustable Pedal Buttons (If Equipped).

See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedalon page 121.

O. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 184.

P. Storage Compartment.Q. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps

on page 184.R. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 352.S. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on

page 132.T. Horn. See Horn on page 170.U. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Three Spoke) on page 282 or Audio SteeringWheel Controls (Four Spoke) on page 283.

V. Accessory Power Outlet. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 186.

169

W. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P)on page 132.

X. Center Console Storage Compartment. SeeCenter Console Storage Area on page 160.

Y. Traction Control Button or Enhanced TractionSystem Button (If Equipped). See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 295 EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 297.

Z. Rear Wiper/Washer Controls (If Equipped).See Windshield Washer on page 174.

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn the policeand others that you have a problem. The front andrear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt and Telescopic Steering WheelA tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. The steering wheelcan be raised to the highest level to give your legsmore room when you enter and exit the vehicle.

170

The lever that lets you tilt and telescope thesteering wheel is located on the left side of thesteering column.

To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull downthe lever. Then move the steering wheel up ordown or backward or forward into a comfortableposition. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• GTurn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 172.

• 3Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 172.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 173.

• P Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lampson page 179.

171

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way upor down to the latched position. When the turn isfinished, the lever will return automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lowerthe lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change.The lever will return by itself when you release it.

A warning chime signal will come on if you have leftyour turn signal on for more than 2/3 mile (1 km).

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andthen check the fuse. See Fuses on page 446.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction leveraway from you.

When the high beamsare on, a light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on if theignition is in ON.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

172

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps momentarily to signal a driver infront of you that you want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If the wiper bladesare frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thawthem. If the blades do become damaged, installnew blades or blade inserts. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 394.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to preventan overload. If the wipers gets stuck, turnthe wipers off, clear away the snow or ice,and then turn the wipers back on.

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at high speed.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at low speed.

& (Delay): Move the lever to this position toset a delay between wipes.

173

6 (Delay/Intermittent Speed Sensitive): When thelever is in the delay position, move the intermittentadjust band to set for shorter or longer delay cycles.To the left of the adjust band are bars that indicatethe frequency of the wipes. Smaller bars mean thewiper movement is less frequent. Larger bars meanthe wiper movement is more frequent.

During intermittent wiping mode, the delay cycletime is sensitive to vehicle speed. As the vehiclespeed increases your delay cycle time will decreaseand wiper movement will occur more frequently.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn offthe windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tomist and release for a single wiping cycle. Thewindshield wipers will stop after one wipe and thelever will return to its original position. If additionalwipes are needed, hold the band on mist longer.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on formore than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps willturn on automatically. They will turn off 15 secondsafter the wipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherTo wash your windshield, push in the button at theend of the stalk until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the button, the washers willstop, but the wipers will continue to wipe for aboutthree cycles and will either stop or will resumethe speed you were using before.

174

Rear Window Wiper/Washer(MAXX Model)

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

If your vehicle has arear window wiper, theswitch is located onthe center console.See Instrument PanelOverview on page 168.

Press the top of the switch to put the wiper incontinuous operation mode. Press the bottomof the switch to put the wiper system in delaymode. Press the center of the switch to wash andwipe the rear window. Washer fluid will sprayup the glass as long as the switch is pushed.When the switch is released, the wipers willcontinue to cycle about three times. To turn eitherof the wiper settings off, press the oppositeside of the switch. Pressing the button all theway down to either side turns on a wiper setting.

There is one shared washer fluid reservoirfor the front and rear windshield wipers.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 380.

175

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruise controlon slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons are located on left sideof the steering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off.

RES+ (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

4–Spoke Steering WheelCruise Controls

3–Spoke Steering WheelCruise Controls

176

SET– (Set/Coast): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the set speed.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol.

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Press the button with the cruise controlsymbol on it.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET– button located on thesteering wheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

177

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shuts offthe cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the RES+ button on your steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to your chosenspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• If the cruise control system is alreadyengaged, press the RES+ symbol.Hold it there until you get up to the speedyou want, and then release the button.

• To increase your speed in very small amounts,press the RES+ symbol briefly and thenrelease it. Each time you do this, your vehiclewill go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the set button on thesteering wheel until you reach the lowerspeed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe set button on the steering wheel briefly.Each time you do this, you’ll go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehiclewill slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you mayhave to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain

178

your speed. When going downhill, you may haveto brake or shift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the brake takesyou out of cruise control. Many drivers find thisto be too much trouble and do not use cruisecontrol on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to disengage thecruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruisecontrol disengages, the cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster will go out.

• Press the on/off button, this will turn off thecruise control system.

• Press the cancel button. When cruise controldisengages, the cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster will go out.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the following fourpositions:

2(Headlamps): This position turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): This position turns onthe parking lamps and taillamps only.

179

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System):This position automatically turns on theDaytime Running Lamps during daytime,and the headlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps at night.

P (Off/On): This position is the momentaryOff/On switch for the Automatic HeadlampSystem. In Canada, this only works whenthe vehicle is in PARK (P).

When operating in AUTO, a momentary turnof the switch to off/on will turn off the AutomaticHeadlamp System. Turn the switch to off/on againwill turn the Automatic Headlamp System backon. The Automatic Headlamp System is alwaysturned on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.

The following charts show the condition of thevehicle’s exterior lamps when the transaxle is not inPARK (P) and the switch is moved to each position:

United States Exterior Lamp Positions for DaytimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp OFF DRL Mode OFF ON

Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON

Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON

United States Exterior Lamp Positions for NighttimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp OFF ON OFF ON

Parking Lamp OFF ON ON ON

Taillamp OFF ON ON ON

180

Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for DaytimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp DRL Mode DRL Mode DRL Mode ON

Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON

Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON

Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for NighttimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp ON ON ON ON

Parking Lamp ON ON ON ON

Taillamp ON ON ON ON

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door and turn off theignition while leaving the lamps on, you willhear a warning chime.

Headlamps Off in PARK (P)This feature works when the ignition is ON andit is dark outside. To turn the headlamps off whenit is dark outside but keep other exterior lights on,

turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lampposition. In this position, the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license plate lampsand instrument panel lights are on, but theheadlamps are off.

To turn on the headlamps along with the otherlamps when it is dark outside, turn the exteriorlamp control to the AUTO or headlamp position.

This feature will not work for Canadian vehicles.

181

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature will continue toilluminate the headlamps for 20 seconds after thekey is turned to off at night. Then the headlampswill automatically turn off.

To override the 20 second delayed headlampfeature while it is active turn the switch at theend of the turn signal/multifunction lever tothe off/on position.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make iteasier for others to see the front of your vehicleduring the day. DRL can be helpful in manydifferent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will turn your low-beamheadlamps on at a reduced brightness whenthe following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is turned toAUTO. In addition, Canadian vehiclesDRL will also turn on if you have turnedon the parking lamps.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.See the end of this section for moreinformation on the light sensor.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lightswill not be illuminated.

The DRL system will be off any time yourvehicle is in PARK (P). The DRL system onU.S. vehicles can also be turned off by usingthe off/on switch for one ignition cycle.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

182

Light SensorYour vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Make sure it is not coveredor the headlamps may remain on when youdo not need them. The light sensor for theDRL and Automatic Headlamp features islocated on top of the instrument panel.

The automatic headlamp system may be onwhen driving through a parking garage, heavyoutcast weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system turns on the headlamps atthe normal brightness along with other lampssuch as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,and the instrument panel lights. The radio lightswill also be dim.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel that controls the automaticheadlamp system. Make sure it is not coveredor the automatic headlamp system will be onwhen it is not needed.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DRLand the automatic headlamp systems so thatdriving under bridges or bright overhead streetlights does not affect the system. The DRLand automatic headlamp systems will only beaffected when the light sensor sees a changein lighting lasting longer than this delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage,the automatic headlamp system comes onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it takesabout one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrument panel cluster maynot be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrumentpanel brightness control is in the full bright position.See “Instrument Panel Brightness Control” underInstrument Panel Brightness on page 184.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, turn the ignition on and set the exteriorlight switch to the off/on position. For Canadianvehicles, the transaxle must stay in PARK (P) forthis function.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamps when they are needed.

183

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle hasthis feature, the buttonfor the fog lampsis located on theinstrument panel,to the left of thesteering wheel.

If your vehicle has fog lamps, the ignitionmust be on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on.An indicator light in the button will glow whenthe fog lamps are on. Push the button againto turn the fog lamps off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for thisfeature is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them.

Dome LampThe switch on this lamp has three positions.The on position will turn on the lamp anytime.The door position will turn on the lamp whenevera door is opened. The off position will shut offthe lamp completely, even while a door isopened. Your dome lamp may be equippedwith two rear reading lamps. See Rear ReadingLamps on page 185.

184

Entry/Exit LightingWhen you open any door, the lamps inside ofyour vehicle will go on. These lamps will fadeout 20 seconds after the last door is closed,or when the ignition is turned on after all doorshave been closed. These lamps will also goon when you press the trunk release button,the unlock button or the panic button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

The lamps inside of your vehicle will turn onfor about 10 seconds after your key is removedfrom the ignition to provide an illuminated exit.

Parade DimmingParade dimming is a separate lighting modeof operation that is activated if the park lampsare turned on during the day. Usually whenthe park lamps are turned on during the day,the display’s illumination and LEDs become lowerand the backlighting is activated. To avoid thiscondition, backlighting is turned off, and thedisplays and LEDs are set to a high predeterminedintensity when daylight conditions are detectedto enhance the display’s visibility during daytime.

Front Reading LampsPush the lens to turn the reading lamps on andoff. The reading lamps will turn on when the dooris open if the dome lamp is in the door position.The reading lamps will also turn on with thedome lamp switch in the on position. The lampswill not turn on if the door is open and thedome lamp is in the off position.

Rear Reading LampsThe vehicle’s dome lamp may have two readinglamps. The reading lamps turn on and off bypushing on the lens.

Trunk LampThe trunk lamp comes on when you openyour trunk.

185

Cargo LampIf your vehicle is the MAXX model, it has a cargolamp. The cargo lamp comes on when the liftgate isopened. If you want to leave the liftgate open youcan turn off the cargo lamp by pushing on the lens.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery run-down protectionfeature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visorvanity) is left on while the ignition is turned off,the battery run-down protection system willautomatically shut the lamp(s) off after 20 minutes.This will avoid draining the battery.

To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of thefollowing:• Turn on the ignition.• Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on.• Open a door.• Press any remote keyless entry transmitter

button (if equipped).• Press the remote trunk release button.• Press the power door lock switch.

The battery run-down feature will also be activatedwhen any door on the vehicle is left open andthe ignition is in OFF.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With accessory power outlets you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone.

For vehicles with Traction Control system, theaccessory power outlets are located on the frontof the center console storage area and alsoinside the console storage compartment. Thecompartment has notches that allow power cordsto be routed outside of the console while thelid is closed. On vehicles without Traction Control,both outlets are located on the front of thecenter console storage area. There is also anoutlet in the rear cargo area of the MAXX.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended periods will drain the battery.Always turn off electrical equipment whennot in use and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum amperage rating.

186

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outletcan cause damage not covered by yourwarranty. Do not hang any type of accessoryor accessory bracket from the plug becausethe power outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To usethe lighter, located on the instrument panel belowthe climate controls, push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let the lighter backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse couldbe blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighterin while it is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

187

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. If yourvehicle has the remote start feature, the climatecontrol system will function as part of the remotestart feature. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 97.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe fan speed. The fan must be on to runthe air-conditioning compressor.

To change the air delivery settings, turn the rightknob to select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets. Some air may be directedtoward the side windows.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theside window outlets and windshield.

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. When thismode is selected, air from outside the vehiclewill circulate throughout your vehicle. When thebutton is pressed, an indicator light will come on tolet you know that it is activated. The outside airmode can be used with all modes, but it cannot beused with the recirculation mode. Pressing thisbutton will cancel the recirculation mode.

188

? (Recirculation): Press the left side ofthe button to turn the recirculation mode on. Whenrecirculation mode is selected, the air inside thevehicle will be recirculated through the climatecontrol system and the vehicle, not from outsideyour vehicle. This mode is helpful when youare trying to limit odors from entering your vehicleand for maximum air conditioning performancein hot weather. When the button is pressed,an indicator light above the button will come on tolet you know that it is activated. The recirculationindicator light will blink three times if you try touse recirculation in a mode that it can not beused in. Only use this mode when it is needed forcomfort, since window fogging will rapidly occurif the air conditioning compressor is not engaged.

Pressing this button will cancel the outside airmode. When you switch to the defog or defrostmodes the system will automatically movefrom recirculation to outside air. When the vehicleor fan is turned off and back on, the systemwill default to outside air automatically. Only userecirculation mode when it is needed for comfort,since window fogging may occur.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

When it’s cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower,use the engine coolant heater, if equipped,to provide warmer air faster to your vehicle.An engine coolant heater warms the coolantthat the engine uses to provide heat to warmthe inside of your vehicle. For more information,see Engine Coolant Heater on page 122.

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. When theair conditioning button is pressed, an indicator lightwill come on to let you know that air conditioningis activated.

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneathyour vehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

189

Maximum Air ConditioningOn hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the C vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select #air conditioning.

4. Select the ?recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modesto choose from to clear fog or frost from your

windshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode splits the air between thewindshield and the floor outlets with a small amountdirected to the side windows. When you selectthis mode, the system turns off recirculationautomatically. The air-conditioning compressorwill run unless the outside temperature is at orbelow freezing. The air-conditioning compressorwill operate although the indicator light will not beon. The air-conditioning indicator light will turn offwhen defog is selected. If the air-conditioningbutton is pressed while in defog mode, the indicatorlight will turn on. If the button is pressed again, thelight will turn off. The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows are clear.

1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of theair to the windshield with some air directed tothe floor vents. In this mode, the system willautomatically force outside air into your vehicle.

190

The air-conditioning compressor will run unlessthe outside temperature is at or below freezing.The air-conditioning compressor will operatealthough the indicator light will not be on.The air-conditioning indicator light will turn offwhen defrost is selected. If the air-conditioningbutton is pressed while in defrost mode, theindicator light will turn on. If the button is pressedagain, the light will turn off. Recirculation cannotbe selected while in the defrost mode.

To help clear the windshield quickly, do thefollowing:

1. Select the defrost mode.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming gridto remove fog or frost from the rear window.

<REAR: Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light willcome on to let you know that the rear windowdefogger is activated. Be sure to clear as muchsnow from the rear window as possible.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger will turn off about 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If turned on again, the defoggerwill only run for about seven minutes beforeturning off. The defogger can also be turned offby pressing the button again or by turning offthe engine.

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window defoggerwill remain on once the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature,the rear defogger will automatically be turned onif it is cold outside. When the vehicle transitionsout of the remote start mode, the rear defoggerwill turn off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 97.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, youcould cut or damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anything similarto the defogger grid.

191

Automatic Climate Control SystemIf your vehicle has this system, you canautomatically control the heating, cooling andventilation in your vehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fanspeed control and the air delivery mode controlknobs to activate the automatic system. Whenautomatic operation is active the system willcontrol the inside temperature and air delivery.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Place the fan knob and the mode knobto AUTO.The display will now show the current settemperature. When auto is selected, theair conditioning operation and air inlet will beautomatically controlled. The air conditioningcompressor will run when the outsidetemperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The airinlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s hotoutside, the air inlet may automatically switchto recirculate inside air to help quickly cooldown your vehicle.

2. Set the temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with an initialtemperature setting and allow about 20 minutesfor the system to regulate. Press the up ordown arrow temperature buttons to adjust thetemperature setting as necessary. If youchoose the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C)the system will remain at the maximum coolingsetting. If you choose the temperature settingof 90°F (32°C) the system will remain at the

192

maximum heat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not cause the vehicleto heat or cool any faster.Be careful not to cover the sensor locatedon the top of the instrument panel nearthe windshield. This sensor regulates airtemperature based on sun load, and alsoturns on your headlamps.Also be careful not to cover the sensor grilleon the lower right side of the climatecontrol faceplate. This senses the insidevehicle temperature needed for properregulation.To avoid blowing cold air at start-up incold weather, the system will delay turningon the fan until warm air is available.The length of delay depends on the enginecoolant temperature. Turning the fan knobwill override this delay and change the fanto a selected speed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature,the climate control display will initiallyshow “AS” in place of the temperature toindicate the remote start has been activated.

The system will automatically regulate thetemperature according to the following:

• If inside air temperature is below 72°F (22°C),the system will automatically adjust to thefollowing settings: highest fan speed, defrostmode, recirculation, and the full heat position.

• If inside air temperature is above 79°F (26°C)the system will automatically adjust to thefollowing settings: highest fan speed, panelmode, recirculation, and full cold position.

• If inside air temperature is between 72°F (22°C)and 79°F (26°C), the system will adjustautomatically to the following settings: mediumfan speed, panel mode, recirculation, and thefull cold position.

The climate control will change back to manualoperation by turning on the vehicle with the key.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 97.

The heater works best if you keep thewindows closed while using it.

193

Manual OperationYou may manually adjust the air delivery modeor fan speed.

9(Off): Select this position on the fan knobto turn off the entire climate control system.Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and will bedirected to the floor. This direction can be changedby changing the mode position. The temperaturecan also be adjusted using either the up ordown arrow temperature buttons.

9 (Fan): The knob with the fan symbol allowsyou to manually adjust the fan speed.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theside window outlets and windshield.

:(Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. When thismode is selected, air from outside the vehicle

will circulate throughout your vehicle. When thebutton is pressed, an indicator light will come on tolet you know that it is activated. The outside airmode can be used with all modes, except with therecirculation mode. Pressing this button willcancel the recirculation mode.

?(Recirculation): Press the left side of thebutton to turn the recirculation mode on. Whenrecirculation mode is selected, the air inside thevehicle will be recirculated through the climatecontrol system and the vehicle, not from outsideyour vehicle. This mode is helpful when you aretrying to limit odors from entering your vehicle andfor maximum air conditioning performance in hotweather. When the button is pressed, an indicatorlight above the button will come on to let you knowthat it is activated. The recirculation indicator lightwill blink three times if you try to use recirculation ina mode that it can not be used in. Only use thismode when it is needed for comfort, since windowfogging will rapidly occur if the air conditioningcompressor is not engaged.

Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculationfeature. Each time the vehicle is started, the systemwill revert to the auto recirculation function.

194

If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog orfloor, the light on the button will flash three timesand go out to let you know this is not allowed.This is to prevent window fogging.

When the weather is cool or damp, operating thesystem in recirculation for extended periods oftime may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows.To clear the fog, select either defog or defrost.Make sure the air conditioning is on. You will wantto allow the air conditioning to run automaticallyto help dehumidify the air.

xw (Temperature Control): Press the upand down arrows to increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button toturn the air conditioning compressor on and off.A light above the button will illuminate when theair conditioning is on.

When air conditioning is selected or in AUTOmode, the system will run the air conditioningautomatically to cool and dehumidify the airentering the vehicle.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

On cool, but sunny days while using manualoperation of the automatic system, use bi-level todeliver warm air to the floor and cooler air tothe instrument panel outlets. To warm or cool theair delivered, press the temperature buttons tothe desired setting.

In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidifythe air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTOmode, the system will maximize its performanceby using recirculation as necessary.

On cold days when using manual operation of theautomatic system, choose floor mode to deliverair to the floor outlets. To warm or cool theair delivered, push the temperature buttons tothe desired setting.

If you want to use the automatic mode, turn theknob to AUTO and adjust the temperature bypressing the temperature buttons.

195

Defogging and DefrostingYou can use either defog or front defrost to clearfog or frost from your windshield. Use the defogmode to clear the windows of fog or moisture.Use the front defrost button to defrost the frontwindshield.

- (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windowsof fog or moisture. Turn the mode knob to thisposition to select this setting. This settingwill deliver air to the floor and windshield outlets.

0 (Defrost): Turn the mode knob to thisposition to defrost the windshield. The systemwill automatically control the fan speed if youselect defrost from AUTO mode. If the outsidetemperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, yourair conditioning compressor will automatically runto help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.The air conditioning indicator light will blinkthree times if you try to turn off the compressorwhile in this mode.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light abovethe button will come on to let you know that therear window defogger is activated.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger will turn off about 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If you need additional warmingtime, press the button again.

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window defogger willremain on once the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has heated mirrors this button willalso activate that feature.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, therear defogger and heated mirrors will automaticallybe turned on if it is cold outside. The indicatorlight will not be on. When the vehicle transitionsout of remote start mode the rear defoggerand heated mirrors will turn off.

196

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheels on the air outlets, locatedon the center and on the sides of the instrumentpanel, to change the horizontal direction ofthe airflow. Use the tabs on the outlet vanesto change the vertical direction of the airflow.Use the tabs on the outlet vanes to shut offairflow to the outlets.

The two upper outlets in the center of theinstrument panel are dedicated to the rear seats.These outlets are fixed to aim airflow into therear seats to help cool the rear occupants inhot weather. Airflow can be shut off at theupper outlets by turning the vertical thumbwheel.The louvers are fixed, do not attempt to movethem or they may break.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clearof objects to help circulate the air insideof your vehicle more effectively.

• When an objectionable odor outside thevehicle is encountered, use the recirculationmode, with the temperature knob at acomfortable setting to prevent the odor fromentering the vehicle through the ventilationsystem. This can be helpful when drivingthrough a long tunnel with poor ventilation.However, extended usage of this mode in coldor cool weather can cause window fogging.

197

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights andgages on your vehicle. The pictures help tolocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to the warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As the details show on the next few pages,some warning lights come on briefly when youstart the engine just to let you know they areworking. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there is a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your vehicle’s warning lightsand gages. They can be a big help.

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to letyou know at a glance how your vehicle is running.You’ll know how fast you’re going, how muchfuel you’re using, and many other things you willneed to drive safely and economically.

198

Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that areexplained on the following pages.

United States Base version shown, Canada and SS Model Similar

199

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someonetries to turn it back.

If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,it must be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer. If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must be put onthe driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far you havedriven since you last reset it.

The trip odometer is accessed and reset through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operationand Displays on page 218 for more information.

200

Tachometer

The tachometer shows your engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START,a chime will come on for several seconds toremind people to fasten their safety belts, unlessthe driver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt lightwill also come onand stay on forseveral seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

201

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. This would only occur if the passengerairbag is enabled. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 82 for more information. Thepassenger safety belt light will also come on andstay on for several seconds, then it will flashfor several more.

This chime and lightis repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle isin motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows theairbag symbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiringand the crash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 72.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light shouldgo out. This meansthe system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you aredriving, your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

202

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle, it meansthe airbag system may not be workingproperly. The airbags in your vehicle maynot inflate in a crash, or they could eveninflate without a crash. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the airbagreadiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.


203

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it meansthat the right front passenger’s frontal airbagis enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on whenyou have a rear-facing child restraintinstalled in the right front passenger’sseat, it means that the passenger sensingsystem has not turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag. A child in a rear-facingchild restraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right front passenger’sairbag inflates. This is because the backof the rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.Do not use a rear-facing child restraintin the right front passenger’s seat if theairbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbagif the system detects a rear-facingchild restraint, no system is fail-safe,and no one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

204

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 82 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together,it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. If this everhappens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passengerseat may not have the protection of thefrontal airbag. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 202.

205

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come onbriefly when you turnon the ignition, butthe engine is notrunning, as a check toshow you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running.If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.


206

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake systemwarning light will also come on when you setyour parking brake. The light will stay on if yourparking brake does not release fully. If it stayson after your parking brake is fully released,it means you have a brake problem.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) may displaya BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 222 for more information.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pulloff the road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push or the pedal may gocloser to the floor. It may take longer to stop.Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one ortwo times, if the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing Your Vehicleon page 330.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

207

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when your engine isstarted and may stay on for several seconds.This is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off.If the light comes on and the chime sounds whenyou are driving, stop as soon as possible andturn the ignition off. Then start the engine againto reset the system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. If the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you donot have anti-lock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 206 earlier in this section.

The ABS warning light will come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to ON. This isnormal. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

208

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If your vehicle hasthe Traction ControlSystem (TCS), thislight may come on forthe following reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing theTC (traction control) button located onthe center console, the light will come onand stay on. To turn the system back on,press the button again and the warning lightshould go out.

• If there is a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, theTCS will turn off and the warning lightwill come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time whenthe system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

Traction Control SystemActive Light

If your vehicle hasthe Traction ControlSystem (TCS), thislight will come onwhen the system islimiting wheel spin.

Slippery road conditions may exist if the TCSactive light comes on, so adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The light will stay on for a few seconds afterthe system stops limiting wheel spin.

209

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing theTC (traction control) button located onthe center console, the light will come onand stay on. To turn the system back on,press the button again and the warning lightshould go out.

• If there’s a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, theETS will turn off and the warning lightwill come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time whenthe system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

Enhanced Traction SystemActive Light

If your vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), thislight will come onwhen the system islimiting wheel spin.

Slippery road conditions may exist if theEnhanced Traction System active light comeson, so adjust your driving accordingly.

The light will stay on for a few seconds afterthe system stops limiting wheel spin.

210

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light indicatesthat the engine coolanthas overheated orthe radiator cooling fanis not working.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working.

If the light comes on and the vehicle has beenoperating under normal driving conditions,pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

See Cooling System on page 374 for moreinformation.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area,the light comes on and you hear a chime, yourengine is too hot! It means that your enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions and the gage reads hot,you should pull off the road, stop your vehicleand turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 371.


211

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle hasa computer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 344.

212

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed• Avoiding hard accelerations• Avoiding steep uphill grades• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled as soonas it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 349.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turnthe light off.

213

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 346. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.(These conditions may go away once the engineis warmed up.) This will be detected by thesystem and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will requireat least one full tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designedto evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take severaldays of routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspectionfor lack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

214

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine,or come on and youwill hear a chime whenyou are driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem.Have it fixed immediately.

This light will come on briefly when you turnon the ignition as a check to show you it isworking. If it does not come on with the ignitionon, you may have a problem with the bulb.Have it fixed right away.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil assoon as possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

215

Security Light

For informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 113.

Cruise Control Light

This light comeson whenever you setthe cruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 176for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 172 for more information.

216

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuelyou have left, when the ignition is on. When theindicator nears empty, this light, located left of thepump symbol, will come on and you will hear achime. You still have a little fuel left, but youshould get more soon. The arrow on the fuel gagepoints to side of the vehicle with the fuel door.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.These are normal and do not indicate a problemwith your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.


217

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) providesthe following:

• A way to personalize your vehicle

• Trip information

• Warning messages

The buttons used to activate the DIC are locatedon the left side of the vehicle’s audio system.

INFO/4 (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.

MENU: Press this button to enter and scrollthrough the menu mode.

ENTER/r (Enter): Press this button to selecta menu option or to acknowledge a warningmessage.

The DIC messages will be read through youraudio system display.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is ON. If yourvehicle has the uplevel audio system, the timeand outside temperature is shown on the first lineof the display and the DIC information is shownon the second line of the display.

The DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the following section.


218

Information Mode

INFO/4 (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displaysin the following order:

• TRIP A

• TRIP B

• FUEL RANGE (Fuel Range Until Empty)

• ECON (Average Fuel Economy)

• AV SPEED (Average Vehicle Speed)

• OIL LIFE (Engine Oil Life System)

TRIP A or TRIP B: Press the informationbutton until TRIP A or TRIP B is displayed.This shows the current distance traveled sincethe last reset for each trip odometer in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometerscan be used at the same time. Each trip odometercan be reset to zero separately by pressing andholding the enter button for a few secondswhile the desired trip odometer is displayed.

FUEL RANGE: Press the information buttonuntil FUEL RANGE is displayed. This showsthe remaining distance you can drive withoutrefueling. It is based on fuel economy andthe fuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOWdisplays.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. Fuel range cannot be reset.

ECON (Economy): Press the informationbutton until ECON is displayed. Average fueleconomy is how many miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicleis getting based on current and past drivingconditions.

Press and hold the enter button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fueleconomy is not reset, it will be continuallyupdated each time you drive.

219

AV (Average) SPEED: Press the informationbutton until AV SPEED is displayed. This showsthe vehicle’s average speed in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h).

Press and hold the enter button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

OIL LIFE: Press the information button untilOIL LIFE is displayed. The engine oil life systemshows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life.It shows 100% when the system is reset afteran oil change. It will alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life system afteran oil change. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 362.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 460 andEngine Oil on page 359.

Personalization

MENU: Press this button while the ignition is ONto scroll through each of the personalization optionsin the following order. To avoid excessive drain onthe battery, it is recommended that the headlampsare turned off. If the vehicle is moving faster than2 mph (3 km/h), the personalization menu optionsare not available, except for the UNITS option.All of the personalization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable display on the DIC.

• Oil Life Reset

• Units Selection (English/Metric)

• Remote Start Capability

• Horn Chirp During Remote KeylessEntry Locking

• Horn Chirp During Remote KeylessEntry Unlocking

220

• Exterior Light Flash During Remote KeylessEntry Locking or Unlocking

• Delayed Locking

• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: Specific Doors

• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: When Key is Offor When Shift To Park

• Exterior Perimeter Lighting During RemoteKeyless Entry Unlock

• Select Language: (English, French, Spanishor German)

When the desired option is reached, press theenter button to toggle between the modes ofthat option. To make a selection, press theMENU button again.

If no selection is made within 10 seconds,the display reverts back to the previousinformation displayed.

The MENU mode is exited when the informationbutton is pressed, a 10 second time periodhas elapsed, the ignition is turned to OFF, or theend of the MENU list is reached.

See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 225 formore information on the personalization options.

Enter

ENTER/r (Enter): Press this button to resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC display. This buttonalso toggles through the options available ineach personalization menu.

221

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message will clear when that condition is nolonger present on the vehicle. To acknowledge amessage and clear it from the display, pressany of the three DIC buttons. If the condition isstill present, the warning message will come backon the next time the vehicle is turned off andback on. With most messages, a warning chimesounds when the message displays. Yourvehicle may have other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF: This messagedisplays if the automatic headlamp system isdisabled with the headlamp switch.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON: This messagedisplays if the automatic headlamp system isenabled with the headlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUID: This message displays toinform the driver that the brake fluid level is lowwhile the ignition is in ON. The brake systemwarning light on the instrument panel clusteralso comes on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 206 for more information. Have thebrake system serviced by your dealer/retaileras soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOON: This message displayswhen the life of the engine oil has expired and itshould be changed.

When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, you stillmust reset the engine oil life system separately.See Engine Oil Life System on page 362, EngineOil on page 359, and Scheduled Maintenanceon page 460 for more information.

222

CHECK GAS CAP: This message displays if thefuel cap has not been fully tightened. Recheckthe fuel cap to make sure that it is on properly.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the message off.

DOOR AJAR: This message displays if one ormore of the vehicle’s doors are not closed properly.Make sure that the door is closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLED: This message displaysif the starting of the engine is disabled. Haveyour vehicle serviced immediately by yourdealer/retailer.

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED: Thismessage displays to inform you that the vehiclehas reduced engine power to avoid damagingthe engine. Reduced engine power can affect thevehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this messageis on, but there is no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. The performancemay be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven.

The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhile this message is on, but accelerationand speed may be reduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should be taken to yourdealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

GATE AJAR: If your vehicle has a liftgate,this message displays when the liftgate is notclosed completely. Make sure that the liftgateis closed completely. See Liftgate (MAXX)on page 110 for more information.

ICE POSSIBLE: This message displays when theoutside air temperature is cold enough to createicy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW: This messagedisplays if the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter battery is low. Replace the batteryin the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 97.

223

LOW FUEL: This message displays along witha low fuel warning light on the instrument panelcluster when your vehicle is low on fuel. Refillthe fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel onpage 346 and Filling the Tank on page 349.

LOW WASHER FLUID: This message displayswhen your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid.Refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soonas possible. See “Adding Washer Fluid” underWindshield Washer Fluid on page 380.

POWER STEERING: This message displaysif a problem has been detected with the electricpower steering, if your vehicle has this feature.Have your vehicle serviced immediately by yourdealer/retailer.

PUSH PARK PEDAL: This message displays ifthe parking brake is left engaged. See ParkingBrake on page 132 for more information.

SERVICE AIR BAG: This message displaysif there is a problem with the airbag system.Have your vehicle serviced immediately byyour dealer/retailer.

TRUNK AJAR: If your vehicle has a trunk, thismessage displays when the trunk lid is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the trunk lid is closedcompletely. See Trunk (Sedan) on page 108for more information.

224

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationThe following personalization options may appearon your vehicle’s audio display by pressing theMENU button:

OIL LIFE RESET: When this option is displayed,you can reset the engine oil life system.To reset the system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 362.

UNITS: When UNITS appears on the display,press the enter button to move between METRICor ENGLISH. When you have made your choice,press the MENU button to record your selection.The initial setting from the factory is English forthe United States and metric for Canada.

If you choose English, all information will bedisplayed in English units.

If you choose metric, all information will bedisplayed in metric units.

The unit measurement will also change the tripodometer, temperature, and average fueleconomy displays.

REMOTE START: If your vehicle has thisfeature, the remote start option can be enabledor disabled. When REMOTE START appearson the display, press the enter button to movebetween OFF and ON. When you have madeyour choice, press the MENU button to recordyour selection. The initial setting from thefactory is ON.

LOCK HORN: If your vehicle has RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), this option which allowsthe vehicle’s horn to chirp every time thelock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK HORNappears on the display, press the enter buttonto move between ON and OFF. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU button torecord your selection. The initial setting fromthe factory is OFF.

225

UNLOCK HORN: If your vehicle has RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), this option which allowsthe vehicle’s horn to chirp every time the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, canbe enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK HORNappears on the display, press the enter buttonto move between ON and OFF. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU button torecord your selection. The initial setting fromthe factory is OFF.

LIGHT FLASH: If your vehicle has RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), this option which allowsthe vehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting toflash every time the lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed,can be enabled or disabled. When LIGHT FLASHappears on the display, press the enter buttonto move between OFF and ON. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU button torecord your selection. The initial setting fromthe factory is ON.

DELAY LOCK: The delayed locking option, whichdelays the actual locking of the vehicle, can beenabled or disabled. When DELAY LOCK appearson the display, press the enter button to movebetween OFF and ON. When you have made yourchoice, press the MENU button to record yourselection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.

AUTO UNLK (Unlock): The automatic doorunlocking option, which allows the vehicleto automatically unlock certain doors canbe enabled or disabled. When AUTO UNLKappears on the display, press the enter buttonto move between ALL, DRIVER, or NONE.When you have made your choice, press andthe MENU button to record your selection.The initial setting from the factory is ALL.See Programmable Automatic Door Lockson page 106 for more information.

226

UNLK (Unlock): This screen displays only ifDRIVER or ALL is selected for the AUTO UNLKoption. This option determines when the automaticdoor unlocking will occur, when either the key isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shifted intoPARK (P). When UNLK appears on the display,press the enter button to move between KEY OFFand SHIFT TO P (Park). When you have madeyour choice, press the MENU button to record yourselection. The initial setting from the factory isSHIFT TO P (Park). See Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks on page 106 for more information.

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS: If your vehicle hasRemote Keyless Entry (RKE), this option, whichallows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter lightingto turn on each time the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display, pressthe enter button to move between ON and OFF.

When you have made your choice, press the MENUbutton to record your selection. The initial settingfrom the factory is ON.

LANGUAGE: To select your choice of language,press the enter button to move between theoptional languages.

The languages are ENGLISH, FRENCH,SPANISH, and GERMAN.

Choosing a language will display all of theinformation on the DIC in the desired language.

When you have made your choice, press theMENU button for at least one second to recordyour selection. The initial setting from the factoryis ENGLISH.

227

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Drivingon page 288. By taking a few moments to readthis manual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort,as well as take advantage of its features.While your vehicle is parked, set up your audiosystem by presetting your favorite radio stations,setting the tone and adjusting the speakers.Then, when driving conditions permit, you cantune to your favorite stations using the presetsand steering wheel controls if the vehiclehas them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which youcan help avoid distraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presettingyour favorite radio stations, setting thetone, and adjusting the speakers.

228

Then, when driving conditions permit, youcan tune to your favorite radio stations usingthe presets and steering wheel controls ifthe vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer/retailer.Also, check federal rules covering mobileradio and telephone units. If sound equipmentcan be added, it is very important to do itproperly. Added sound equipment can interferewith the operation of your vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and even damagethem. Your vehicle’s systems can interferewith the operation of sound equipment thathas been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 119 for more information.

Setting the Time for Radios withoutRadio Data Systems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button.The clock symbol displays and the hour flashes.Turn the ADJ (adjust) knob to increase or todecrease the hours. To set the minutes, pressthe clock button again. The minutes flash.Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to decreasethe minutes. The time can be set with theignition on or off.

229

Setting the Time for Radios withRadio Data Systems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button. The clocksymbol displays and the hour flashes. Turn theADJ (adjust) knob to increase or to decrease thehours. To set the minutes, press the clockbutton again. The minutes. Turn the ADJ knob toincrease or to decrease the minutes. The timecan be set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the clock button toenter the clock set mode, then press and hold theclock button for three seconds until UPDATEDdisplays. If the time is not available from thestation, NO UPDATE displays.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuningto an RDS broadcast station, it can take a fewminutes for the time to update.

Radio with CD (Base Level)

Playing the Radio

O(Power): Press theOknob to turn the systemon and off.

u(Volume): Turn theuknob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

United States shown, Canada similar

230

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the time and the temperature or theradio station frequency and the temperature. Whenthe ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until the desired option displays, thenhold the knob for two seconds. The radio produces abeep and the selected display becomes the default.

Finding a Station

AM/FM/CD: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and CD. The selection displays.

ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

SEEK w / SEEK x: Press the SEEK up worthe SEEK down xarrow to go to the previousor to the next station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either theup SEEK wor the SEEK down xarrow fortwo seconds until a beep sounds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press either theSEEK up wor the SEEK down xarrow againto stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherthe SEEK up wor the SEEK down xarrowfor more than four seconds until two beeps sound.The radio goes to the first preset station storedon the pushbuttons, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station. Press eitherthe SEEK up wor the SEEK down xarrowagain to stop scanning presets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM/FM/CD to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

231

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

TONE / P / Q (Bass/Treble): To adjust thebass or the treble, press and release the tonebutton until BASS or TREB (treble) displays.Turn the ADJ (adjust) knob to increase orto decrease the tone. If a station is weak orhas static, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BASS or TREB. Then press and holdthe tone button for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To adjust the tone controls to the middle position,first exit tone by pressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that function, or by waitingfive seconds until the default display returns.Then press and hold the tone button for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.ALL CENTERED displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE /S (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance between the right andthe left speakers, press and release the balanceand fade button until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the ADJ knob to move the sound towardthe right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and therear speakers, press and release the balance andfade button until FADE displays. Then turn theADJ knob to move the sound toward the frontor the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance or the fade to the middleposition, select BAL or FADE. Then press andhold the balance and fade button for morethan two seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To adjust the speaker controls to the middleposition, first exit balance and fade by pressinganother button, causing the radio to perform thatfunction, or by waiting five seconds until the defaultdisplay returns. Then press and hold the balanceand fade button for more than two seconds untila beep sounds. ALL CENTERED displays.

232

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If CALIBRATE displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. If you want to insert a CD with theignition off, first press the eject button or theDISP knob.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CDin the player, it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying, where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur,check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surfaceof the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs and DVDs on page 285 for moreinformation.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

233

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

1s(Reverse): Press and hold thesbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release thesbutton to playthe passage. The elapsed time of the track displays.

2\(Fast Forward): Press and hold the\button to advance quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release the\pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

3 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once tohear a track over again. REPEAT ON and RPTdisplays. The current track continues to repeat.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEATOFF displays and RPT disappears from the display.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton tohear the tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. T#, RANDOM, and RDM displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play. RANDOM OFFdisplays and RDM disappears.

SEEK w: Press the SEEK up warrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. The track number displays. If thisbutton is pressed more than once, the playercontinues moving backward through the CD.

If this button is held for more than two seconds,the CD enters CD scan mode and the CD playsthe first 10 seconds of each track. Press the SEEKup warrow again to stop scanning.

SEEK x: Press the SEEK down xarrow to goto the previous track. The track number displays.If this button is pressed more than once, theplayer continues moving forward through the CD.

234

If this button is held for more than two seconds,the CD enters CD scan mode and the CD playsthe first 10 seconds of each track. Press theSEEK down xarrow again to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see the currenttrack number, time, and temperature or the tracknumber, the elapsed time of the track, and thetemperature.

To change the default on the display, press thisknob until the desired option displays, then holdthe knob for two seconds. A beep sounds andthe selected display becomes the default.

AM/FM/CD: Press this button when listening tothe radio to play a CD.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press the EJECT /Zbutton to eject a CD. Eject can be activatedwith either the ignition or radio off. CDs can beloaded with the ignition and radio off if thisbutton is pressed first.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returnsto normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait aboutan hour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

235

Radio with CD (Uplevel)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning localand national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases,a radio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.


236

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio



DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the time and the temperature orthe radio station frequency and the temperature.When the ignition is off, press this knob to displaythe time.

For RDS, press this knob to change what displayswhile using RDS. The display options are stationname, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the nameof the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press this knob while inXM mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until you see the desired display,then hold the knob for two seconds. The radioproduces a beep and the selected displaybecomes the default.

237

AUTOu(Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Pressthe AUTOubutton to select LOW, MEDIUM,or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW (automatic volumelow), AUTO VOL MEDIUM (automatic volumemedium), or AUTO VOL HIGH (automatic volumehigh) displays. Each higher setting allows formore volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then as you drive, automatic volumeincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcomenoise at any speed. The volume level shouldalways sound the same to you as you drive.AUTO VOL NONE (automatic volume none)displays if the radio cannot determine the vehiclespeed or if the engine is not running. To turnautomatic volume off, press the AUTOubuttonuntil AUTO VOL OFF (automatic volume off)displays.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).The selection displays.


xSEEK w: Press the down xor up wSEEKarrow to go to the previous or to the nextstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either thedown xor up wSEEK arrow for two secondsuntil a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either the down xor up wSEEKarrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherthe down xor up wSEEK arrow for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound. The radiogoes to the first preset station stored on thepushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next preset station. Press either thedown xor up wSEEK arrow again to stopscanning presets.


238

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM,or XM1 or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO TONE (automatic tone) orAUTO EQ (automatic equalization) toselect the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is storedfor that pushbutton.


Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE / P / Q (Bass/Treble): Press and releasethis button until BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the ADJ knob to increase orto decrease the tone. The display shows the bass,midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak orhas static, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, select BASS, MID, or TREB.Then press and hold the tone button for morethan two seconds. One beep sounds and the tonecontrol adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position,press and hold the tone button while no tone controldisplays. ALL CENTERED displays and a beepsounds. The bass, midrange, and treble adjuststo the middle position.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forcountry, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOTONE or AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM displays.You can also manually adjust the bass, midrange,and treble using the tone button.

239


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance between the right andthe left speakers, push and release the balanceand fade button until BAL displays. Turn theADJ knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and therear speakers, push and release the balanceand fade button until FADE displays. Turn theADJ (adjust) knob to move the sound towardthe front or the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and holdthe balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds. One beep sounds and the speakercontrol adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the tone button whileno speaker control displays. ALL CENTEREDdisplays and one beep sounds. The balanceand fade adjusts to the middle position.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. PTY for FM or PTYPE forXM and a program type displays.

2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays, press theup wSEEK arrow to select the PTY andgo to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY pressthe up wSEEK arrow again. If the radiocannot find the desired PTY, NONE FOUNDdisplays and the radio returns to the laststation you were listening to.After 15 seconds of inactivity or if theP-TYPE button is pressed again, the radioexits program type select mode.

240

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BANDfor two seconds. FM ALT FREQ ON andAF displays. The radio can switch to stationswith a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press andhold BAND again for two seconds. FM ALTFREQ OFF displays and AF disappears.The radio does not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement,even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.If a CD is playing, play stops during theannouncement. Alert announcements cannotbe turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current station has amessage, MSG displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts ofthe message displays every three seconds.To scroll through the message, press and releasethe MSG button. A new group of words displayafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage has displayed, MSG disappears untilanother new message is received. The lastmessage can be displayed by pressing theMSG button. The last message can be vieweduntil a new message is received or a differentstation is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO MESSAGE displays.

241

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAFFIC displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements andwhen a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button andthe radio seeks to a station that does. When astation that broadcasts traffic announcementsis found, the radio stops seeking and TRAFbetween brackets appears on display. If nostation is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC INFO displays.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAFbutton to turn off the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement evenif the volume is low. The radio interrupts theplay of a CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If CALIBRATE displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer/retailerfor service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 259 later inthis section for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. If you want to insert a CD with theignition off, first press the eject button or theDISP (display) knob.

242

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CDin the player, it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying, where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that hasbeen recorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, checkthe bottom surface of the CD. If the surface ofthe CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs and DVDs on page 285 for moreinformation.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

s(Reverse): Press and hold thesbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thesbutton to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

243

\(Fast Forward): Press and hold the\buttonto advance quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release the\buttonto play the passage. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button once to heara track over again. REPEAT ON and RPTdisplays. The current track continues to repeat.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.REPEAT OFF displays and RPT disappears.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. T#, RANDOM, and RDM displays, T andthe track number displays when each trackstarts to play. Press RDM again to turn offrandom play. RANDOM OFF displays andRDM disappears.

xSEEK w: Press the down xSEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track if more thaneight seconds have played. If this arrow is pressedmore than once, the player continues movingbackward through the CD.

Press the up wSEEK arrow to go to the startof the next track. If this arrow is pressed morethan once, the player continues moving forwardthrough the CD.

If either the down xor up wSEEK arrow isheld or pressed for more than two seconds,the CD enters CD scan mode and the CD playsthe first 10 seconds of each track. Press eitherthe down xor up wSEEK arrow again tostop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see howlong the current track has been playing. T, thetrack number, and the elapsed time of thetrack appears on the display. To change thedefault on the display, time or elapsed time,press the knob until the desired option displays,then hold the knob for two seconds. The radioproduces one beep and the selected displaybecomes the default. Pressing this buttonalso displays text on commercially recordedCDs (if available).

244

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select thedesired equalization setting while playing aCD. The equalization is automatically recalledwhen a CD is played. For more information,see AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ listed previouslyin this section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to playa CD or to access a remote device (if installed)while listening to the radio.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press the EJECT /Zbutton to eject a CD. Eject can be activatedwith either the ignition or radio off. CDs canbe loaded with the ignition and radio off if thisbutton is pressed first.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:


• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.


If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

245

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning localand national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases,a radio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.


246

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio



DISP (Display): Press this knob to switchthe display between time and temperature orradio station frequency and temperature.When the ignition is off, press this knob todisplay the time.

For RDS, press the DISP knob to changewhat displays while using RDS. The displayoptions are station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY, and the name of theprogram (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPknob while in XM mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, pressthe DISP knob until the desired optiondisplays, then hold the knob for two seconds.A beep sounds and the selected displaybecomes the default.

247

AUTOu(Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Pressthe AUTOubutton to select LOW, MEDIUM,or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW (automatic volumelow), AUTO VOL MEDIUM (automatic volumemedium), or AUTO VOL HIGH (automatic volumehigh) displays. Each higher setting allows formore volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then as you drive, automatic volumeincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcomenoise at any speed. The volume level shouldalways sound the same to you as you drive.AUTO VOL NONE (automatic volume none)displays if the radio cannot determine the vehiclespeed or if the engine is not running. To turnautomatic volume off, press the AUTOubuttonuntil AUTO VOL OFF (automatic volume off)displays.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).The selection displays.


xSEEK w: Press the down xor up wSEEKarrow to go to the previous or to the nextstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either thedown xor up wSEEK arrow for two secondsuntil a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either the down xorup wSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherthe down xor up wSEEK arrow for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound. The radiogoes to the first preset station stored on thepushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. Press either thedown xor up wSEEK arrow again to stopscanning presets.


248

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM,

or XM1 or XM2.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO TONE (automatic tone) or

AUTO EQ (automatic equalization) toselect the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is storedfor that pushbutton.


Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE / P / Q (Bass/Treble): Press and releasethis button until BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or

to decrease the tone. The display shows the bass,mid, or treble level. If a station is weak or has static,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, select BASS, MID, or TREB.Then press and hold the tone button for morethan two seconds. The display level adjusts tothe middle position and a beep sounds.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position,press and hold the tone button when no tonecontrol displays. ALL CENTERED displays anda beep sounds.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forcountry, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

The equalization setting last chosen displays whenyou first press this button. Each time you pressthis button, another equalization setting displaysand automatic tone or automatic equalizationswitches to that preset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press theAUTO TONE or AUTO EQ button untilCUSTOM displays. Then manually adjust thebass, midrange, and treble using the tone button.

249


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance between the right and theleft speakers, push and release the balanceand fade button until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the ADJ (adjust) knob to move the soundtoward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and release the balance andfade button until FADE displays. Turn theADJ knob to move the sound toward thefront or the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and holdthe balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds. The display level adjusts to themiddle position and a beep sounds.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middleposition, press and hold the tone button when nospeaker control is displayed. ALL CENTEREDdisplays and a beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program

type select mode. PTY for FM or PTYPE forXM and a program type displays.

2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.3. Once the desired PTY displays, press the

up wSEEK arrow to select and go to thePTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY pressthe up wSEEK arrow again. If the radiocannot find the desired PTY, NONE FOUNDdisplays and the radio returns to the laststation you were listening to.

5. Press P-TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and no longer displays,go back to Step 1.

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected PTYand traffic announcements.

250

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BANDfor two seconds. FM ALT FREQ ON andAF displays. The radio can switch to stationswith a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. FM ALT FREQ OFFdisplays and AF disappears. The radio does notswitch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement,even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.If a CD is playing, play stops during theannouncement. Alert announcements cannotbe turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current station has amessage, MSG displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the MSGbutton. A new group of words display after everypress of this button. Once the complete messagehas displayed, MSG disappears until another newmessage is received. The last message can displayby pressing the MSG button. The last messagecan be viewed until a new message is received ora different station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO MESSAGE displays.

251

MSG (Traffic): If TRAFFIC displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements andwhen a traffic announcement comes on thetuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcasttraffic announcements, press and hold thisbutton for two seconds and the radio seeks to astation that does. When a station that broadcaststraffic announcements is found, the radio stopsseeking and TRAF between brackets displays.When a traffic announcement comes on thetuned radio station you will hear it. If no stationis found that broadcasts traffic announcements,NO TRAFFIC INFO displays.

If TRAF displays, press and hold the MSGbutton for two seconds to turn off the trafficannouncements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement evenif the volume is low. The radio interrupts theplay of a CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If CALIBRATE displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer/retailerfor service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 259 later inthis section for further detail.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CDin the player, it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

252

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number also displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that hasbeen recorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur,check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surfaceof the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of YourCDs and DVDs on page 285 for more information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could getcaught in the CD player. If a CD is recordedon a personal computer and a description labelis needed, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” laterin this section.

LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for INSERT CD to flash on the display.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

253

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep sounds and MULTI LOAD CD,then INSERT CD and the number displays.

3. Once INSERT CD and the number displays,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, INSERT CD andthe number displays again. After that, you canload another CD. The CD player takes upto six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, the radio begins to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD displays and the currently selectedslot number is underlined.

EJECT/Z: To eject a single CD pressthe EJECT/Zbutton. The radio displaysEJECTING CD # and the single CD symbolflashes until the CD is ready to be removed.

When the CD is ready to be removed it ejectspart way from the radio and the display changesto a flashing REMOVE CD # with the singleCD symbol flashing until the CD is removed.If the CD is not removed within 25 seconds theradio pulls it back in.

To eject multiple CDs, press and hold theEJECT/Zbutton until a beep sounds andEJECTING ALL CDS displays with the single CDsymbol flashing. The CD symbol flashes untila CD is ready to be removed. When the CD isready to be removed it ejects part way fromthe radio and the display changes to a flashingREMOVE CD # with the single CD symbolflashing until the CD is removed. If the CD isnot removed within 25 seconds the radio pullsit back in. After the CD is removed the radiorepeats the previous actions until all of the CDshave been removed or a CD is pulled back in.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number displays. To playa specific CD, press the numbered pushbuttonthat corresponds to the CD you want to play.A small bar displays under the CD number thatis playing, and the track number also displays.

254

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

s(Reverse): Press and hold thesbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release thesbutton toplay the passage. T#, the elapsed time, andREV (reverse) displays.

\(Fast Forward): Press and hold the\buttonto advance quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release the\buttonto play the passage. T#, the elapsed time, andFWD (forward) displays.RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackor an entire CD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:• To repeat the track you are listening to,

press and release the RPT button. REPEATON and RPT displays. Press RPT again toturn off repeat play. REPEAT OFF displaysand RPT disappears.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for more thantwo seconds. REPEAT ON and RPT displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.REPEAT OFF displays and RPT disappears.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be played in random, rather thansequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks in random order on theCD this is currently playing, press the RDMbutton. RANDOM TRACKS and RDM displays.Press RDM again to turn off random play.RANDOM OFF displays and RDM disappears.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded, in random order, press and hold theRDM button for more than two seconds.A beep sounds, RANDOM ALL CDS, andRDM displays. Press RDM again to turn offrandom play. RANDOM OFF displays andRDM disappears.

xSEEK w: Press the down xSEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thaneight seconds have played. Press the up wSEEKarrow to go to the beginning of the next track.If either the down xor up wSEEK arrow is heldor pressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

255

To scan the current CD, press and hold eitherthe downxor up wSEEK arrow for more thantwo seconds. The CD goes to the next track, playsthe first 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.Press either the down xor up wSEEK arrowagain to stop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold eitherthe down xor up wSEEK arrow for more thanfour seconds. The CD goes to the next CD,plays the first 10 seconds of the first track, thengoes to the next CD. Press either the down xorup wSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switchbetween time, temperature, and the elapsedtime of the track. To change the default display(CD#/Track#/Time, CD#/Track#/Temperature,or Track#/Elapsed Time/Temperature), pressthe knob until the desired option displayed,then hold the knob for two seconds. The radioproduces one beep and the selected displaybecomes the default.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select thedesired equalization setting while playing a CD.

The equalization is set when a CD is played.For more information, see “AUTO TONE” or“AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainsinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CDor to access the remote device, when listeningto the radio.

Using Song List / R ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the radio on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not display.If S-LIST is displayed, press the SONG LISTbutton to turn it off.

256

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use theup wSEEK arrow to locate the track tobe saved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the R (song list) buttonfor two or more seconds to save the trackinto memory. When song list is pressed,one beep sounds. After two secondsof pressing R continuously, two beepssound to confirm that the track has beensaved and TRACK number ADDED displays.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

SONG LIST FULL displays if you try to savemore than 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the R button.One beep sounds and SONG LIST displays.The recorded tracks begin to play in the orderthat they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using either thedown xor up wSEEK arrow. Seeking past thelast saved track returns you to the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the R button to turn song list on.SONG LIST displays.

3. Press either the down xor up wSEEK arrowto select the desired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the R button for two seconds.When song list is pressed, one beep sounds.After two seconds of continuously pressingthe song list button, two beeps sound toconfirm that the track has been deletedand TRACK number DELETED displays.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

257

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the R button to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the R button for morethan four seconds. A beep sounds, followedby two beeps after two seconds, and afinal beep sounds after four seconds.SONG LIST EMPTY displays indicatingthat the song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list.Any tracks saved to the song list again areadded to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the song listbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST isremoved from the display.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:


• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.


If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

258

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL(Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

259

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer/retailer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure inthe receiver module

If this message does not clear within a short period oftime, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

260

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemincludes a DVD player, a video display screen,two sets of wireless headphones, and aremote control.

This system also functions as a rear seataudio (RSA) system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Without Entertainment System) on page 278or Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (With EntertainmentSystem) on page 280 for more information.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may be disabled from thedriver’s seat by pressing the power button on theradio twice. To resume use of the RSE systempress the RSE power button.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

The DVD system is designed to be inoperablewhen the vehicle is exposed to extremely low orhigh temperatures, in order to protect your systemfrom damage. Operate the DVD system undernormal or comfortable cabin temperature ranges.

HeadphonesThe RSE system includes two sets of wirelessheadphones.The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF buttonand a volume control. To use the headphonespress, the ON/OFF button. An indicator light onthe headphones illuminate. If the light doesnot illuminate, the batteries might need to bereplaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in thissection for more information. Press the buttonto turn the headphones OFF when not in use.If the RSE system is shut off or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmitters, locatedat the top of the DVD player, for more thanthree minutes, the headphones shut offautomatically to save the battery power.If you move too far forward or step out of thevehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.

261

To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,use the volume control on the headphones.

Make sure that the headphones are worn correctly,left to right, to ensure the signal is receivedproperly.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be coveredby your warranty. Keep the headphonesstored in a cool, dry place.

MAXX vehicles with the RSE system may havea rear seat storage compartment. Store theheadphones and the remote control in thiscompartment when not in use.

The MAXX vehicles may also include two sets ofwireless headphones with foam ear pads thatcan be replaced.

Foam ear pads on the rear seat headphonescan become worn or damaged. The headphonefoam ear pads can become damaged if theyare not handled or stored properly. If theheadphone foam ear pads do become damagedor worn out, the foam pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set. It is notnecessary to replace the complete headphone set.

The headphone replacement foam ear pads canbe ordered in pairs. See your dealer/retailerfor more information.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CDor DVD play, there could be a low hissingnoise through the speakers and/or headphones.If the hissing sound in the wireless headphonesseems excessive, make sure that the headphonebatteries are fully charged. Some amount ofhissing is normal.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment

door located on the left side of the headphoneearpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly using the diagram onthe inside of the battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery compartment door andtighten the screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries, and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

262

Stereo RCA JacksThe RCA jacks are located on the DVD faceplateon the floor console. The RCA jacks allowaudio and video signals to be connected froman auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a videogame unit to the RSE system. The yellow RCAjack is used for video inputs, the red RCA jackfor right audio inputs, and the white RCA jackfor left audio inputs. The system requiresstandard RCA cables, not included, to connectthe auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,connect an external auxiliary device such as acamcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on boththe auxiliary device power and the power on thefront of the RSE system. Press the play andsource buttons at the same time or the AUX buttonon the remote control to switch to the auxiliarydevice. See “DVD Player” and “Remote Control”later in this section for more information.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary devicescan be heard through the following possiblesources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle’s Speakers

• Wired Headphones (not included)

Only one audio source can be heard throughthe vehicles speakers at a time.

The RSE system or an auxiliary device canbe heard through all of the vehicles speakerswhen the following occurs:

• The RSE system is off

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

• The front audio system is on and the SRCEbutton is pressed to enable the RSE system

The headphone symbol appears on the radiodisplay when the RSE system is on and theheadphone symbol disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

263

To turn the vehicles rear speakers on and off,press the power button on the RSE system oron the remote control. When the rear speakersare off, the audio from the RSE system canbe heard through both the wireless headphonesand the vehicles front speakers at the same time.

The RSE system can be heard through thewired headphones, not included, on the RSEsystem when the following occurs:

• The RSE system is on

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

The volume on the radio can vary whenswitching between a radio station, CD, DVD,or auxiliary device.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CDor DVD play, there can be a low hissing noisethrough the speakers and/or headphones.If the hissing sound in the wireless headphonesseems excessive, make sure that the headphonebatteries are fully charged. Some amount ofhissing is normal.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located on the back of thefloor console. Open the video screen by rotatingthe screen up and adjust its position as desired.

The video screen may not be able to be moved upif the rear seat is too far forward. See “Rear SlidingSeat (MAXX Only)” under Rear Seat Operationon page 17 for more information.

When the video screen is not in use, push it downinto its stored position.

The DVD player and display continues to operatewhen the video screen is in either the up ordown positions.

The window on the RSE system contains thetransmitter for the wireless headphones and theremote control. If the screen is in the closedposition, the signals are not available for theoperation of the headphones or the remote control.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

264

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located on the end of the floorconsole under the video screen.

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttonson the RSE system and/or by the buttons onthe remote control. See “Remote Control” laterin this section for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDsof the appropriate region code for the country thatthe vehicle was sold in. The DVD region codeis printed on the jackets of most DVDs. Video CDs,standard audio CDs, and audio CD-Rs can beplayed by the DVD player. The video screendisplays a menu when an audio CD or CD-Ris playing.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

DVD Player Buttons

O (Power): Press theObutton to turn theRSE system on and off.

c /Z (Stop/Eject): Press thec /Z (stop)button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding.Press thec /Z (eject) button again to ejecta DVD or CD.

265

k (Play/Pause): Press thek (play) button tostart play of a DVD or CD. Press thek (pause)button while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it.Press it again to continue play of a DVD or CD.When in menu mode, press thekbutton toenter a selection.

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): This button isinactive when in DVD mode.

BAND: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).If the front seat passengers are listening tothe DVD player, the rear seat passengerscannot select XM1 or XM2.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween playing the radio or a CD.

xSEEK w: Press the down xSEEK arrowto go to the beginning of the current chapter ortrack if more than five seconds have played.Press the up wSEEK arrow to go to the nextchapter or track. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

xw (Volume): Press the down xor up warrowto increase or decrease the volume on the wiredheadphones, not included. The arrows on theleft side are for the left headphone and the arrowson the right side are for the right headphone.

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with thelabel side up, into the loading slot. The DVDplayer continues loading the disc and theplayer automatically starts if the vehicle is inthe CAP position, ACC, or RAP.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure that theDVD player is on, then press thek(play/pause)button on the player faceplate or on the remotecontrol.

Some DVDs do not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or thepreviews. Some DVDs begin playing after thepreviews have finished. If the DVD does notbegin playing at the main title, refer to theon-screen instructions.

266

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and releasethec /Z (stop) button on the DVD playerfaceplate or the remote control.

To resume playback, press thek (play/pause)button on the DVD player faceplate or the remotecontrol. The movie should resume play fromwhere it was last stopped if the disc has not beenejected or the stop button has not been pressedtwice on the remote control.

If the disc has been ejected or if the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on the remote control,press thek(play) button once to resume playat the beginning of the disc. A resume symbolappears momentarily on the video screen.When the resume symbol is displayed, pressthek(play) button again to resume playbackfrom where the disc last stopped.

Ejecting a Disc

Press thec /Z (eject) button, on the DVDplayer or the remote control, to eject the disc.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but notremoved, the DVD player reloads the disc aftera short period of time. The disc is stored inthe DVD player. The DVD player does notresume play of the disc automatically.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow on the DVD player and press the desiredbutton. Direct sunlight or very bright light couldaffect the ability of the transmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. If the remote control doesnot seem to be working, the batteries might needto be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section. Objects blocking the line of sightaffects the function of the remote control.

Notice: Do not store the remote control inheat or direct sunlight. This could damage theremote control and it would not be coveredby your warranty. Keep the remote controlstored in the rear seat armrest when not in use.

If your vehicle is the Malibu MAXX, your vehiclemay have a rear seat storage compartment.Store the headphones and the remote control inthis compartment when not in use.

267

Remote Control Buttons

O(Power): Press theObutton to turn theDVD player on and off.

Z(Eject): Press theZbutton to eject or toload the disc.

P (Backlight): Press the P button to turnthe remote control backlight on. The backlighttimes out after about eight seconds.

r (Enter): Press the r button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

w, x, o, p (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to navigate through DVD menus.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press the y button toview the media menu. The media menu is differenton every disc. Use the w, x, o, pdirectionalarrows to move the cursor around the media menu.After making a selection, press the r button.Press this button again to start play of the disc.

+u− (Wired Headphone Volume): Pressthe + (plus) or − (minus)ubutton to increase orto decrease the volume of both wired headphones(not included).

E (Screen Brightness): Press the + (plus)or − (minus)E button to increase or to decreasethe intensity of the video screen.

q (Return): Press theqbutton to exit thecurrent active menu and return to the previousmenu. This button operates only when a DVD isplaying and/or a menu is active.

268

s (Rewind): Press thesbutton to rewind theDVD or CD. To stop rewinding, press thesbuttonagain. This button might not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

\(Fast Forward): Press the\button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,press the\button again. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

s(Play/Pause): Press the s(play) button tostart play of a DVD or CD. Press the s(pause)button while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it.Press this button again to continue the play ofthe DVD or CD.

While in the menu, press the sbutton to enter aselection. When using RSA or an auxiliary device,pressing the sbutton plays a DVD or a CD if theyare loaded.

g(Previous Chapter/Track): Press this button togo to the beginning of the current track or chapter.Press thegbutton again to return to the previoustrack or chapter. This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

l(Next Chapter/Track): Press thegbutton toadvance to the beginning of the next chapter ortrack. This button might not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

c(Stop): Press thecbutton to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD.Press thecbutton twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

b(Size): Press thebbutton to changethe display mode for 4:3 aspect ratio movies.This function cycles between NORMAL, WIDE,and FULL video modes.

• Normal The horizontal image is not stretched.The borders at the left and the right of thepicture are blanked. All lines of the verticalimage are displayed.

• Wide The horizontal image is non-lineralystretched. The image tends to be stretchedmore at the borders then the middle.The borders are not displayed.

• Full The horizontal image is linearly stretched.All vertical lines are displayed. No bordersare present.

269

z (Display): Press the z button to display thetitle, chapter, the time of a DVD or track number,the time of a CD, and the menu functions onthe video screen. Press the zbutton again toturn off the display item.

} (Audio Compression): DVDs have awide dynamic audio range. Audio compressioncan be used to reduce the difference betweensoft and loud selections of the DVD. Pressthe } button to switch the audio compressionon and off.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

Setup MenuTo access the setup menu, ensure that a DVDis in the player and the video is stopped. Pressthe z (display) button. Once the menu isactivated, use the w, x, o, p (directional)arrows and the r (enter) button to navigatethe screen.

Picture PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows the default viewing preferences to bemodified. Use the remote control up and downarrow buttons to select. The movie can stop whileselections are being made.

TV Shape: The default video screen displaycan be selected from 4:3 letterbox, 4:3 panscan,or 16:9.

Black Level Shift: The default black level to thevideo screen can be adjusted.

Video Shift: The default position of the video onthe display can be adjusted.

Color Settings: The default color setting of thevideo screen can be selected from Personal, Rich,Natural, Soft, or Animation.

Personal Color: The default setting forSaturation, Brightness, and Contrast can beadjusted.

270

Sound PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows the default sound preferences to bemodified. Use the remote control up and downarrow buttons to select. The movie can stopwhile selections are being made.

Analog Output: The default sound output canbe selected from Stereo or Dolby® surround.

Dynamic Compression: The default settingcan be selected as On or Off.

Karaoke Vocal: The default setting can beselected as On or Off.

Language PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows the default language preferences to bemodified. Use the remote control up and downarrow buttons to select. The movie can stopwhile selections are being made.

Audio Language: The default DVD playbackaudio language can be selected from variouslanguages. The audio output is dependenton whether a DVD supports the selected language.

Subtitle: The default DVD subtitle language canbe selected from English, Spanish, or French.The subtitle language is dependent on whetherthe DVD supports the selected language.

Menu: The default on-screen display languagecan be selected from various languages.

FeaturesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows you to modify the default featurepreferences from the display. Use the remotecontrol up and down arrow buttons to select.The movie can stop while selections arebeing made.

Status Window: The status window can beselected as On or Off. The status windowprovides disc type, elapsed time, and numberof titles information while the menu bar isdisplayed or the DVD is stopped.

Help Text: Help text can be selected as Onor Off. A help text bar is provided at the bottomof the screen describing the functions of anitem selected from any of the user menus.

271

Menu BarThe menu bar can be displayed across the top ofthe screen by pressing the z (display) buttonon the remote control. Selecting icons fromthe menu bar allows adjustments to the audio andvideo settings. Use the remote control left andright arrow buttons to scroll through the menu bar.A description of the highlighted icon appears atthe bottom of the screen. Use the down arrow todisplay the options for the highlighted icon.

The movie can stop playing while selections arebeing made.

Current Subtitle Language: The subtitlelanguage can be selected as Off, English,Spanish, or French. The actual subtitle languageis dependent on whether a DVD supports theselected language.

Current Audio Language: The audio languagecan be selected as Off, English, Spanish, orFrench. The actual audio language is dependenton whether a DVD supports the selected language.

Smart Color: This color setting can be selectedwithout changing the default from the colorsettings menu.

Sound Mode: This analog output can be changedwithout changing the default from the analogoutput menu.

Frame-by-Frame: The DVD pauses and canbe viewed frame-by-frame, in forward or reverse,by using the remote control arrow buttons.Press s(play) to resume play of the DVD.DVD audio does not be available during selection.

Slow Motion: The DVD pauses and can be viewedin slow motion, at various speeds, in forward orreverse, by using the remote control arrow buttons.Press s(play) to resume play of the DVD.DVD audio is not available during selection.

Scan Speeds: The DVD can be viewed in fastmotion, at various speeds, in forward or reverse,by using the remote control arrow buttons.Press s(play) to resume play of the DVD.DVD audio is not available during selection.

Enlarge Picture: The DVD pauses and the framecan be enlarged by using the remote control arrowkey buttons. Pressing the r (enter) button on theremote control allows panning of the frame usingthe remote control arrow buttons. Press s(play)to resume play of the DVD. DVD audio is notavailable during selection.

272

Title: Move between DVD titles by using theremote control arrow buttons.

Chapter: Move between DVD chapters byusing the remote control arrow buttons.

Time Search: The user can jump to differentareas of a DVD by using the remote controlarrow and r (enter) buttons to select aspecific time position.

Favorite Track Selection (FTS): You canprogram the unit to play only your favorite trackselections from a DVD or Audio CD. For aDVD, FTS is accessed from the Menu bar.For a CD, the FTS screen displays immediatelywhen the CD is inserted. From the screen, choosethe tracks on the CD that you wish to store,using the remote control right and left arrows andthe r button to select. The player remembersthe selections and each time the CD is insertedin the player, only those tracks are played, if FTSis turned on. The player can remember selectionsfor up to 50 discs. To remove FTS for a disc,the disc must be in the player and the highlightedtracks must be de-selected. Use the right andleft arrow buttons and the r button or selectCLEAR ALL on the display.

Not all DVDs support all of the feature defaultsin the setup menus. In the event a feature isnot supported, defaults are provided by theDVD media.

Exit the setup menu by pressing theq(return)button on the remote control. If changes are madeto the setup menu, the DVD resumes play fromthe beginning.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Unclip the battery door located on the backof the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, using the diagramon the inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

273

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition may not be

in the on position, ACC,or RAP. The parentalcontrol button mighthave been pressed.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed. The systemmight be in auxiliarysource mode. Press theAUX button to switchbetween the DVD playerand the auxiliary source.The disc is upside downor is not compatible.

No sound. The volume on theheadphones could betoo low. Adjust the volumeon the right earpiece onthe wireless headphones.If the DVD system isbeing heard through thevehicle speakers, adjustthe volume from the radio.The radio must have theRSE enabled by usingthe SRCE button.

Problem Recommended ActionThe picture does notfill the screen. There areblack borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Press and release thesize control button on theremote control. This fillsthe screen. If there areborders on the top andbottom, the movie couldhave been made that wayfor a standard screen.

I ejected the disc andtried to take it out, butit was pulled back intothe slot.

Eject the disc again.

The language in theaudio or on the screenis wrong.

Press the main displaymenu button on theDVD player or theremote control andchange the audio orlanguage selection onthe DVD menu.

The remote controldoes not work.

Point the remote controldirectly at the transmitterwindow. The batteriescould be weak or put inwrong. The parentalcontrol button might havebeen pressed. The remotecontrol does not workthe RSA control, onlythe RSE system.

274

Problem Recommended ActionHow do I get subtitleson or off?

Press the display buttonon the remote control togo to the DVDs mainmenu. Then follow thescreen prompts.

After stopping the player,I push the play buttonbut sometimes the DVDstarts where I left off,and sometimes at thebeginning.

Press the stop button onthe remote control toresume where the DVDleft off. Press the stopbutton twice to start theDVD at the beginning.If the power is off and theDVD is still in the player,press the play button.

The DVD is playing butthere is no picture orsound. The auxiliarysource is running butthere is no pictureor sound.

Press and release theAUX button on theremote control or theSRCE and play buttonson the DVD player toget to auxiliary input.Check to make surethat the auxiliary sourceis connected to theinputs properly.

The audio or videoskips or jumps.

The DVD could bedirty or scratched.Try cleaning the DVD.

Problem Recommended ActionWhen I return to theDVD from the systemmenu, sometimes it playsfrom the beginning andsometimes from whereit left off.

If the stop button waspressed once, it resumesplay from where it left off.If the stop button waspressed twice, it starts atthe beginning of the DVD.However, if a changewas made to the menuthe DVD starts fromwhere it left off, even ifthe stop button was onlypressed once.

The fast forward, reverse,previous, and nextfunctions do not work.

Some commands thatdo one thing for DVDsdoes not always work orperform the same functionfor audio CDs or games.These functions canalso be disabled whenthe DVD is playing thecopyright informationor the previews.

275

Problem Recommended ActionMy disc is stuck inthe player. The ejectbutton does not work.

Press the eject button onthe DVD player. Turn thepower off, then on again,then press the ejectbutton on the DVD player.Do not attempt to forceor remove the disc fromthe player. If the problempersists, return to yourdealer/retailer for furtherassistance.

I lost the remote controland/or the headphones.

Contact your dealer/retailer for assistance.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes for a moment,then it comes back.

This could be caused byblocking the transmittingarea between theheadphones and thetransmitter on the DVDplayer. Make surenothing is between theheadphones and theDVD player.

Problem Recommended ActionDVD System inoperable. In severe or extreme

temperatures your DVDsystem might not beoperable. Temperaturesbelow −4°F (−20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)could damage the DVDsystem. Operate theDVD system undernormal or comfortablecabin temperature ranges.

The wireless headphoneshave audio distortion.

Verify that the headphonesare facing to the front ofthe vehicle, left and rightsides are indicated on theheadphones to ensurethat the signal is receivedproperly.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal comingfrom the auxiliary deviceand make sure that theconnection and thesignal are good.

276

DVD MessagesThe following errors can display on thevideo screen:

Disc Format Error: This message displays if adisc is inserted upside down, if the disc is notreadable, or if the disc format is not compatible.

Disc Play Error: This message displays if themechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched ordamaged discs can cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message displays ifthe region code of the DVD is not compatiblewith the region code of the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message displays ifthe disc is not properly loaded or ejected.

Disc Not Present: This message displays whenthe play or the stop button is pressed withouta disc in the player.

DVD DistortionThere could be an experience with video distortionwhen operating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*,two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or nearthe vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate andbuttons, use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use onlya clean cloth dampened with clean water.Use care when directly touching or cleaningthe screen, as damage could result.

277

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Without Entertainment System)This feature allows rear seat passengers tolisten to and control any of the sources: radioand CDs. An audio or radio source can belistened to but cannot be changed from theRSE if the front seat passengers have selectedthe same source from the front seat controls.(For example, the radio station selected withthe front seat controls cannot be changed bythe rear seat control(s)).

The front seat audio controls always havepriority over the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch to the same source as theRSA, the RSA no longer controls the source.

You can operate the RSA when the mainradio is off.

You can use wired headphones (not included) orthe wireless headphones. The wired headphonesconnect to the outlets on the RSA system.The rear seat passengers have control of thevolume for each set of wired headphones.Adjust the volume on the wireless headphonesby turning the volume control on each headset.

Primary Radio ControlsThe following function is controlled by themain radio:

PWR (Power): Front seat passengers can turnthe RSA off by quickly pressing this knob twice.

278

Rear Seat Radio Controls

The following functions are controlled by theRSA system:

n (Volume): Turn the n knob to increase orto decrease the volume. The left knob controlsthe left wired headphones and the right knobcontrols the right wired headphones.

O(Power): Press theObutton to turn thesystem on or off. The rear speakers are mutedwhen the RSA power is turned on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CDwhen listening to the radio. The inactive tapeor CD remains inside the radio for future listening.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

1-6 (Preset): Press this button to go to the nextpreset radio station. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to select the next CD, if multipleCDs are loaded. This function is inactive if thefront seat passengers are listening to a CD.

©¨(Seek): When listening to the radio, pressthe left ©or right ¨seek arrow to go to theprevious or to the next station and stay there. Thisfunction is inactive if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a CD is playing, press the left ©seekarrow to go to the start of the current track ifmore than eight seconds have played. Pressthe right ¨seek arrow to go to the next trackon the CD. This function is inactive if the frontseat passengers are listening to a CD.

279

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(With Entertainment System)This feature allows rear seat passengers tolisten to and control any of the sources: radio andCDs. An audio or radio source can be listenedto but cannot be changed from the RSE if the frontseat passengers have selected the same sourcefrom the front seat controls. (For example, theradio station selected with the front seat controlscannot be changed by the rear seat control(s).

The front seat audio controls always havepriority over the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch to the same source as theRSA, the RSA no longer controls the source.

You can operate the RSA when the mainradio is off.

The rear seat passengers have control ofthe volume for each set of headphones.

O(Power): Press theObutton to turn theRSE system on and off. The rear speakers aremuted when the RSA power is turned on.

1–6 (Preset): Press this button to go to thenext preset radio station set on the pushbuttonson the main radio. This function is not active if thefront seat passengers are listening to the radio.

280

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to select the next CD, if multipleCDs are loaded. This function is not active if thefront seat passengers are listening to a CD.


SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween playing the radio and CD.

xSEEK w: When listening to the radio,press the down xor up wSEEK arrow to goto the previous or to the next station and staythere. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the same band.

When a CD is playing, press the down xSEEKarrow to go to the start of the current track ifmore than five seconds have played. Press theup wSEEK arrow to go to the next track ona CD. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

xw (Volume): Press the down xor up warrowto increase or decrease the volume on the wiredheadphones (not included). The arrows on theright are for the right headphones and the arrowson the left are for the left headphones.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discouragetheft of your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN). If theradio is moved to a different vehicle, it doesnot operate and LOCKED displays.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radiocannot operate if stolen.

281

Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Three Spoke)

If your vehicle hasthis feature, someaudio controls canbe adjusted atthe steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw: Press the down xarrow to go to theprevious or to the next radio station and staythere. The radio only seeks stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either thedown xor up warrow for two seconds untilSCAN displays and a beep sounds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press either thedown xor up warrow again to stop scanning.

When a CD is playing, press the down xorup warrow to go to the previous track.

To scan the current CD, press and hold eitherthe down xor up warrow for more thantwo seconds. The CD goes to the next track,plays the first 10 seconds, then goes to the nexttrack. Press either the down xor up warrowagain to stop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and holdeither the down xor up warrow for morethan four seconds. The CD goes to the next CD,plays the first 10 seconds of each track, thengoes to the next CD. Press either the down xorup warrow again to stop scanning.

+ − (Volume): Press the + (plus) or − (minus)button to increase or to decrease the volume.

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this buttonto play stations that are programmed on theradio preset pushbuttons. The radio only seekspreset stations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next availableCD, if multiple CDs are loaded.

282

Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Four Spoke)

If your vehicle hasthis feature, someaudio controls canbe adjusted atthe steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Seek): Press the down xor up warrowto go to the previous or to the next radiostation and stay there. The radio only seeksstations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either thedown xor up warrow for two seconds untila beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,

plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either the down xor up warrowagain to stop scanning.

When a CD is playing, press either thedown xor up warrow to go to the previous orto the next track.

> (Mute): Press the >button to silence thesystem. Press the >button again, or any otherradio button, to turn the sound on.


1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this buttonto play stations that are programmed on theradio preset pushbuttons. The radio only seekspreset stations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next available CD,if multiple CDs are loaded.

+ / − x (Volume): Pull the + (plus) or − (minus)x button to increase or to decrease the volume.

283

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static during normalradio reception can occur if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater thanfor FM, especially at night. The longer rangecan cause station frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radio reception, mostAM radio stations boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when thingslike storms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducingthe treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

284

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scansthe bottom surface of the disc. If the surfaceof a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly ornot at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating thelens of the CD optics with lubricants internal tothe CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast Antenna (MAXX Only)The fixed mast antenna can withstand mostcar washes without being damaged. If the mastshould ever become slightly bent, straighten it outby hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the rear quarter panel.

285

Backglass Antenna (Sedan Only)The AM-FM antenna is integrated with therear window defogger, located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the grid lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp objectto clear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distortthe incoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will not be coveredby your warranty.

Because this antenna is built into the rear window,there is a reduced risk of damage caused bycar washes and vandals.

If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle,and the antenna needs to be attached to theglass, make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged. There isenough space between the grid lines to attacha cellular telephone antenna without interferingwith radio reception.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the bestperformance from the XM™ system if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

286

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 288Defensive Driving ...................................... 288Drunken Driving ........................................ 289Control of a Vehicle .................................. 292Braking ...................................................... 292Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 293Braking in Emergencies ............................. 295Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 295Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 297Steering .................................................... 299Off-Road Recovery .................................... 302Passing ..................................................... 302Loss of Control .......................................... 304Competitive Driving ................................... 305Driving at Night ......................................... 306Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 307

City Driving ............................................... 311Freeway Driving ........................................ 312Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 313Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 314Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 315Winter Driving ........................................... 317If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 322Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 323Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 324

Towing ........................................................ 330Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 330Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 330Towing a Trailer ........................................ 333

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

287

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

288

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:• Judgment• Muscular Coordination• Vision• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths havebeen associated with the use of alcohol, with morethan 300,000 people injured.Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking. Forpersons under 21, it is against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

289

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

290

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impairedat a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and thatthe effects are worse at night. All driversare impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in acollision increases sharply for drivers who have aBAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with aBAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or herchance of having a collision. At a BAC level of0.10 percent, the chance of this driver havinga collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street? Aperson with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means thatwhen anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled is higherthan if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you are witha group, designate a driver who willnot drink.

291

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehiclego where you want it to go. They are the brakes,the steering, and the accelerator. All threesystems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 344.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 206.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourthsof a second. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight allplay a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehiclemoving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the conditionof the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

292

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 344.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle might have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle hasABS, this warninglight on the instrumentpanel will come onbriefly when you startyour vehicle.

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

293

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you willnot have time to apply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You might feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

294

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS,your first reaction — to hit the brake pedalhard and hold it down — might be the wrong thingto do. Your wheels can stop rolling. Once theydo, the vehicle cannot respond to your steering.Momentum will carry it in whatever direction itwas headed when the wheels stopped rolling.That could be off the road, into the very thing youwere trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can dothis by pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding,ease off the brake pedal. This will help youretain steering control. If you do have ABS, it isdifferent. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)on page 293.

In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both ofthe front wheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens, the systemreduces engine power and may also upshiftthe transmission to limit wheel spin. Also, thetraction control system activates the appropriatecorner brakes to gain even quicker control tolimit wheel spin.

295

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

It will come on when TCS is limiting wheel spin.You may feel or hear the system working,but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCSbegins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may re-engagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 176.

The TCS operates in all transmission shift leverpositions except park or neutral. But the systemcan upshift the transmission only as high asthe shift lever position you’ve chosen, so youshould use the lower gears only when necessary.See Automatic Transaxle Operation (BaseModels) on page 124 or Automatic TransaxleOperation (SS Models) on page 128.

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

When the system is off, this warning light willcome on to let you know if there’s a problem, or ifthe system has been turned off.

When the warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the TCS on.But you can turn the system off if you prefer.

To turn the system on or off, press the TC buttonlocated under the climate controls. In order toeffectively “rock” the vehicle, you will need toturn off TCS.

If you press the TC button once, the tractioncontrol system will turn off and the TCS warninglight will come on. Press the TC button againto turn the system back on. The TCS warninglight will go off.

296

When you turn the system off, the TCS warninglight will come on and stay on. If the TCS islimiting wheel spin when you press the button toturn the system off, the warning light will comeon – but the system won’t turn off right away.It will wait until there’s no longer a current needto limit wheel spin.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 344 for moreinformation.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it senses that one orboth of the front wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens, the systemreduces engine power and may also upshiftthe transmission to limit wheel spin.

This light will come onwhen your EnhancedTraction System isengaged and limitingwheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the ETSbegins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may re-engagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 176.

The ETS operates in all transmission shiftlever positions. But the system can upshift thetransmission only as high as the shift lever positionyou’ve chosen, so you should use the lowergears only when necessary.

297

When the system is on,this warning light willcome on to let you knowthere’s a problem.

When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the ETS on.But you can turn the system off if you prefer.

To turn the system onor off, press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the center consoleunder the climatecontrol system.

When you turn the system off, the ETS warninglight will come on and stay on. If the ETS is limitingwheel spin when you press the button to turnthe system off, the warning light will come on – butthe system won’t turn off right away. It will waituntil there’s no longer a current need to limitwheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The traction controlsystem warning light should go off.

298

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf your vehicle has the electric power steeringsystem and the engine stalls while you are driving,the power steering assist system will continue tooperate until you are able to stop your vehicle. Ifyou lose power steering assist because the electricpower steering system is not functioning, you cansteer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly aftera few normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, contact yourdealer/retailer for service repairs. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 222.

Hydraulic Power SteeringIf your vehicle has the hydraulic power steeringsystem and you lose power steering assistbecause the engine stops or the power steeringsystem is not functioning, you can steer, but it willtake much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels.If there is no traction, inertia will keep thevehicle going in the same direction. If you haveever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

299

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too muchof those places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm those placeswhere the tires meet the road and make you losecontrol. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 295 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 297.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will wantto go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 344.

300

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked carsand stops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply the brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock thewheels. See Braking on page 292. It is betterto remove as much speed as you can froma possible collision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or right depending on thespace available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

301

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothingin the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. You can turn the steeringwheel up to one-quarter turn until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead,then goes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

302

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a doublesolid line, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

303

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicletoo rapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

304

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer the wayyou want the vehicle to go. If you start steeringquickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out.Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehiclecontrol more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to getthe wheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadilywhen you have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using your vehiclefor competitive driving. After reviewing yourwarranty book, please see the GM PerformanceParts website or catalog for parts and equipmentrequired for competitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitivedriving, the engine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oil levels candamage the engine. Be sure to check the oillevel often during competitive driving andkeep the level at or near the upper mark thatshows the proper operating range on theengine oil dipstick. For information on howto add oil, see Engine Oil on page 359.

305

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reducethe glare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

306

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

307

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stopand may cause pulling to one side.You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

308

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple thewater’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower thanthe underbody of your vehicle. If you cannotavoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

309

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwisebe very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 397.

310

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streetsis the amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 312.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

311

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

312

Once you are on the freeway, adjust yourspeed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rateif it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless youwant to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move tothe proper lane well in advance. If you missyour exit, do not, under any circumstances,stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you caneasily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keepit serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. Ifit needs service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

313

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are thelenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleepat the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch ofroad with the same scenery, along with thehum of the tires on the road, the drone of theengine, and the rush of the wind against thevehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let ithappen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leavethe road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

314

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the roadahead and to the sides. Check your rearviewmirrors and your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap,get some exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

315

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

316

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highestgear possible.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.There could be something in your lane, like astalled car or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountainsthat warn of special problems. Examples arelong grades, passing or no-passing zones,a falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alertto these and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 397.

317

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, orgrip, and will need to be very careful.

318

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too.If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 293. This system improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Whether you have ABSor not, you will want to begin stopping soonerthan you would on dry pavement. Without ABS,if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let upon the brakes a little. Push the brake pedaldown steadily to get the most traction you can.

319

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumpsof trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while youare actually on the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could bein a serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through the snow.Here are some things to do to summon help andkeep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blankets orextra clothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

320

You can run the engine to keep warm,but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so youmight not know it is in your vehicle.Clear away snow from around the baseof your vehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe. And checkaround again from time to time to besure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the sideof the vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

321

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, makeit go a little faster than just idle. That is, pushthe accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel forthe heat that you get and it keeps the batterycharged. You will need a well-charged batteryto restart the vehicle, and possibly for signalinglater on with your headlamps. Let the heaterrun for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only whenyou feel really uncomfortable from the cold.But do it as little as possible. Preserve thefuel as long as you can. To help keep warm,you can get out of the vehicle and do somefairly vigorous exercises every half hour orso until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

If your vehicle has a traction system, the tractionsystem can often help to free a stuck vehicle. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 295 orEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 297.If the stuck condition is too severe for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn the traction systemoff and use the rocking method.

322

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin athigh speed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheelsas little as possible. Do not spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 323.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 416.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has a traction system, youshould turn the traction system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 295 or EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 297. Thenshift back and forth between REVERSE (R) anda forward gear, spinning the wheels as littleas possible. Release the accelerator pedal whileyou shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicleout after a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 330.

323

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

Label Example

324

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 397 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 406.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX pounds” on yourvehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 333 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

325

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

326




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 3

327

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label, found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door, tells youthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for either the frontor rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

328

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk or rear areaof your vehicle. In a trunk, put themas far forward as you can. Try tospread the weight evenly. If you havefold-down rear seats, you will findfour anchors on the back wall of yourtrunk. You can use these anchorsto tie down lighter loads. They arenot strong enough for heavy things,however, so put them as far forwardas you can in the trunk or rear area.



• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

329

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 481.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such asbehind a motorhome), see “RecreationalVehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing are known as“dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”(towing your vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment,many vehicle can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice andequipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 313.

330

Dinghy TowingThe Malibu Sedan SS and Maxx SS cannot bedinghy towed.

For vehicles that can be dinghy towed, followthese steps:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.

2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent your battery from draining whilethe vehicle is being towed, remove thefollowing fuse from the instrument panelfuse block: IGN SENSOR. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 447 for moreinformation.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to install the fuses once you reachyour destination. To reinstall a fuse, do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Reinstall the fuse.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)while towing your vehicle, it could bedamaged. Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)while towing your vehicle.

331

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never haveyour vehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly TowingTo tow your vehicle with a dolly and two wheelson the ground, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designedfor towing.

5. Release the parking brake.

332

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

If you have a Malibu Sedan SS or a Maxx SS,trailer towing is not recommended. Your vehiclewas neither designed nor intended to tow a trailer.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped witha 3.5L V6 engine and the proper trailer towingequipment.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,durability and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has tobe used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the drag of theadded weight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

333

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not onlywhere you live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can bestate or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can aska hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it hasall the required trailering equipment. The weight ofadditional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted fromthe maximum trailer weight.

334

When towing a trailer on long uphill grades whilethe outside temperature is above 85°F (29°C),reduce your vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h)to avoid overheating the engine cooling system.

You can ask your dealer/retailer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us atour Customer Assistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 479 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weightof the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it,and the people who will be riding in the vehicle.And if you tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW because your vehiclewill be carrying that weight, too. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 324 for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 324. Then be sure you don’tgo over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

335

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that doesnot attach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal theholes later when you remove the hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust can getinto your vehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 136. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains betweenyour vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so thatthe tongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions aboutsafety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains and do not attach themto the bumper. Always leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig. And, neverallow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes?

Be sure to read and follow the instructions forthe trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly. And because youmay have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap intoyour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If youdo, both systems won’t work well, or at all.

336

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are drivingis now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform (and attachments), safety chains,electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes,start your vehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller by hand to besure the brakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up aheadwhen you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’rea good deal longer, you’ll need to go muchfarther beyond the passed vehicle before youcan return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and, if possible, havesomeone guide you.

337

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle mayneed additional wiring. Check with yourdealer/retailer. The arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash whenever you signal a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’reabout to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, youmay think drivers behind you are seeingyour signal when they are not. It’s important tocheck occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbsare still working.

Driving On GradesWhen towing a trailer on long uphill grades whilethe outside temperature is above 85°F (29°C),reduce your vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h)to avoid overheating the engine cooling system.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift down, you might have to useyour brakes so much that they would get hotand no longer work well.

Pay attention to the engine coolant gage.If the indicator is in the red area, turn off theair conditioning to reduce engine load. SeeEngine Overheating on page 371.

338

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured,and both your vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shiftinto PARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place,release the regular brakes until the chocksabsorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then applyyour parking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

339

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the

pedal down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clearof the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. Things that are especiallyimportant in trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,drive belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, andthe Index will help you find them quickly.If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to reviewthis information before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nutsand bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. SeeEngine Overheating on page 371.

340

Service ........................................................ 344Accessories and Modifications ................... 344California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 345Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 345Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 346Fuel ............................................................. 346

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 346Gasoline Specifications .............................. 347California Fuel ........................................... 347Additives ................................................... 347Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 348Filling the Tank ......................................... 349Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 351

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 352Hood Release ........................................... 352Engine Compartment Overview .................. 354Engine Oil ................................................. 359Engine Oil Life System .............................. 362Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 364Automatic Transaxle Fluid

(2.2L L4 and 3.5L V6 Engines) .............. 365

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.9L V6 Engine) .................................... 366

Engine Coolant .......................................... 368Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 371Engine Overheating ................................... 371Overheated Engine Protection Operating

Mode (3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines) .... 373Cooling System ......................................... 374Power Steering Fluid ................................. 379Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 380Brakes ...................................................... 381Battery ...................................................... 384Jump Starting ............................................ 385

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 389Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 389Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ....................................... 390Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps ............................... 392License Plate Lamp ................................... 393Replacement Bulbs ................................... 394

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 394

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

341

Tires ............................................................ 397Winter Tires .............................................. 398Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 399Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 403Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 406High-Speed Operation ............................... 407Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 408When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 409Buying New Tires ...................................... 410Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 412Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 412Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 414Wheel Replacement .................................. 414Tire Chains ............................................... 416If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 417Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 418Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 419Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 422Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

(Sedan) .................................................. 428Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

(Sedan SS) ............................................ 430

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools(All MAXX Models) ................................. 432

Compact Spare Tire .................................. 434Appearance Care ........................................ 435

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 435Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 436Leather ...................................................... 437Ultra Lux Suede ........................................ 438Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 438Care of Safety Belts .................................. 439Weatherstrips ............................................ 439Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 439Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 440Finish Care ............................................... 440Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 440Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 441Tires ......................................................... 441Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 442Finish Damage .......................................... 442Underbody Maintenance ............................ 442Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 442


342

Vehicle Identification .................................. 444Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 444Service Parts Identification Label ............... 444

Electrical System ........................................ 445Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 445Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 445Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 445

Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 446

Fuses ........................................................ 446Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 447Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 449Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................. 451

Capacities and Specifications .................... 454


343

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicleall GM. Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When yougo to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

344

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 492.

345

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 88.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 472.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

346

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 347 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 212. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered by yourwarranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

347

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

348

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.To open the door, insert your finger into the fingerdepression next to the fuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

349

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 439.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 212.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 222 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer/retailer canget one for you. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light and maydamage your fuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 212.

350

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you andothers:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

351

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is locatedinside the vehicle tothe left of thesteering column.

352

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pushthe secondary hood release handle towardthe driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop rod from its retainerand put the hood prop into the slot markedwith an arrow.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood propfrom the slot in the hood and return the prop toits retainer. Lower the hood 8 to 12 inches(20 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and release itto latch fully. Check to make sure the hoodis closed and repeat the procedure if necessary.

353

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, here is what you will see:

354

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 364.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 359.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 359.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 374.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 381.

F. Battery. See Battery on page 384.G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 449.H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

355

When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

356


B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).See Power Steering Fluid on page 379

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 359.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 359.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 374.

F. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap. SeeCoolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 371

G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 381.

H. Battery. See Battery on page 384.I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 449.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

357

When you open the hood on the 3.9L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

358


B. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See CoolingSystem on page 374

C. Power Steering Fluid. See Power SteeringFluid on page 379.

D. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transaxle Fluid (2.2L L4 and3.5L V6 Engines) on page 365 or AutomaticTransaxle Fluid (3.9L V6 Engine) on page 366.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to AddEngine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 359.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 359.

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 374.

H. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap. SeeCoolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 371

I. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 381.

J. Battery. See Battery on page 384.

K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 449.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 354for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

359

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN mark for the L4 engine orbelow the cross-hatched area at the tip of thedipstick for the V6 engine, you need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.

This section explains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 454.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 354 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

L4 Engine

V6 Engine

360

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute Certified ForGasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure touse the recommended oil can result in enginedamage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

361

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON messagewill come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 222. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has GM-trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuineGM parts and reset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

362

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, reset the system byperforming the following steps:

1. Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for at leastone second. An ACKNOWLEDGED displaymessage will appear for three seconds or untilthe next button is pressed. This will tell youthe system has been reset.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

363

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 354for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change aftereach 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 460 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:1. Remove the screws that hold the cover on.2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Lift off the cover.4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thecover and reconnect the electrical connector.

364

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(2.2L L4 and 3.5L V6 Engines)It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle tothe dealership service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 462, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 468.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 468.

365

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.9L V6 Engine)

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 462, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 468.

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

366

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle has thissymbol on it, and islocated near the rear ofthe engine compartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 354for more information on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

367

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 468.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 468.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains the cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If there isa problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 371.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

368

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set forthe proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, your enginecould get too hot but you would not get theoverheat warning. Your engine could catchfire and you or others could be burned. Usea 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badlydamaged. The repair cost would not be coveredby your warranty. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

369

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer/retailer check the coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 468 for more information.

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in therear of the engine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 354 for moreinformation on location.

370

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When theengine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool. If the surge tankis empty, a special fill procedure is necessary.See Engine Overheating on page 371 and CoolingSystem on page 374.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gage aswell as an engine coolant temperature warning lighton your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 211and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 211.

371

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

372

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode (3.5L V6 and3.9L V6 Engines)This emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, youwill notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The temperature gage willindicate an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 359.

373

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Engine Coolant Surge TankC. Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

3.5L V6 Engine shown, 2.2L L4 and 3.9L V6 Enginessimilar

374

The coolant level should be at or above the FULLCOLD mark on the front of the coolant surgetank. If it is not, you may have a leak at thepressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

375

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankNotice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at or abovethe FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem, including the coolant surge tank pressurecap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 368 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

376

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure capwhen the coolingsystem, includingthe coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upperradiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allowany pressure still left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

377

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the FULL COLD mark on thefront of the surge tank. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see if the levelis below the FULL COLD mark. If the level isbelow the FULL COLD mark, add additionalcoolant to bring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until the level remainsconstant at the FULL COLD mark for atleast five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower than the FULL COLD mark, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolantsurge tank until the level reaches theFULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

See your dealer, if necessary.

378

Power Steering FluidSee EngineCompartment Overviewon page 354 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidPower steering fluid is used in all vehicles withV6 engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder enginehave electric power steering and do not use powersteering fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless a leak is suspected in thesystem, or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid lossin this system could indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick

The fluid level should be within the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

If the fluid is at or below the ADD mark on thedipstick, add just enough fluid to bring thelevel within the crosshatched area.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 468.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

379

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,a LOW WASHER FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 222for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 354for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windsheild washer systemand paint.

380

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 354 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when the linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 206.

381

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 468.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. This willhelp keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 439.

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and could haverear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

382

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specifications onpage 454.

If you have rear drum brakes, they do not havewear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brakerubbing noise, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspected each timethe tires are removed for rotation or changing.When you have the front brake pads replaced,have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is a rapidincrease in pedal travel. This could be a sign thatbrake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

383

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality brake parts. When you replace parts ofthe braking system — for example, when thebrake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between the front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 354 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 385 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

384

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

385

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysturn off your radio and other accessories whenjump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.Turn off the radio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 354 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to the batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, addwater to take care of that first. If you do not,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

386

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

387

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.If the security light flashes, wait until the lightstops flashing.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

Jumper Cable Removal

388

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 394.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

389

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, andParking Lamps

A. High-Beam HeadlampB. Low-Beam Headlamp/DRLC. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 352 for more information.

2. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlampassembly to the vehicle.

3. Remove the headlamp assembly from thevehicle by pulling it forward. Use care notto scratch the vehicle with the lamp orthe lamp with the fender.

390

4. Remove the dust covers (A, B, or C) from theindividual bulb sockets.

5. Disconnect thewiring harness,then turn thebulb socketcounterclockwiseto remove it.

6. Remove the bulbfrom the bulbsocket.

7. Replace the old bulb with a new bulb.

8. Turn the bulb socket clockwise and reconnectthe wiring harness to the bulb socket.

9. Return the headlamp assembly to its originalposition. Be sure to line up the holes in thelamp assembly to the round ends of themounting pins.

10. Reinstall the two bolts attaching the headlampassembly to the vehicle.

391

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk orliftgate. See Trunk(Sedan) on page 108or Liftgate (MAXX)on page 110 formore information.

A. TaillampB. Back-Up LampC. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp

2. Remove the twofasteners located onthe inside of thetrunk at the rear ofthe vehicle.

3. Pull back the trunk trim.

4. Remove the plastic wing nut.

5. Pull out the taillamp assembly and turn thebulb socket one quarter turn counterclockwise.

392

6. Pull the bulb toremove it from thesocket. Replacethe old bulb with anew one.

7. Reverse the steps to attach the taillampassembly to the vehicle.When securing the lamp assembly back intoplace, align the assembly so that the trunklid doesn’t contact it.

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp assembly to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

lamp assembly.

393

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 3157KX

License Plate Lamp *W5W, **168

Headlamps

High-Beam H9

Low-Beam/DRL H11

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp 3057

* Malibu SS**Malibu MAXX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 460.

To replace the wiper blade, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the tab that holds the wiper blade tothe arm.

394

3. Pull the assembly down to release it from theU-hooked end of the wiper arm and slide theassembly away from the arm.

4. Slide in the new wiper blade assembly andsnap it into place.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the other wiper,if necessary.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement – MAXXTo replace the rear wiper blade, do the following:

1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away fromthe window.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper bladeassembly, as shown.

395

3. Hold the wiper blade refill with the curved sidefacing downward.

4. Remove clip (A), shown in step 3, and slide itinto the claw of the wiper blade assembly.

5. Remove clip (B), shown in step 3, and slide itinto the remaining claw of the wiper bladeassembly.

396

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 324.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 406.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 407for inflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

397

Low-Profile Performance TireIf your vehicle has P225/50R18 or P225/50R17size tires, they are classified as low-profileperformance tires. These tires are designedfor very responsive driving on wet or drypavement. You may also notice more roadnoise with low-profile performance tires andthat they tend to wear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage fromroad hazards or curb impact than standardprofile tires. Tire and/or wheel assemblydamage can occur when coming into contactwith road hazards like, potholes, or sharpedged objects, or when sliding into a curb.Your GM warranty does not cover this typeof damage. Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, when possible avoidcontact with curbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice coveredroads often, you may want to get winter tires foryour vehicle. All season tires provide good overallperformance on most surfaces but they maynot offer the traction you would like or the samelevel of performance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed forincreased traction on snow and ice covered roads.With winter tires, there may be decreased dryroad traction, increased road noise, and shortertread life. After switching to winter tires, be alertfor changes in vehicle handling and braking.

See your dealer for details regarding wintertire availability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires on page 410.

398

If you choose to use winter tires:• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on

all four wheel positions.• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load

range, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of

letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

399

GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 412.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).

Compact Spare Tire Example

400

The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 434 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 417.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 406.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

401

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

402

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 406.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 324.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 324.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 324.

403

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 324.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 406 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 324.

404

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 409.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 412.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 324.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 324.

405

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 324. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 434.

406

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have a crashand you or others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require inflationpressure adjustment for high speedoperation. When speed limits and roadconditions are such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make sure the tiresare rated for high speed operation, inexcellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Set the cold tire inflation pressure to35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and rear tires, whenoperating your vehicle at high-speed conditions.

407

When you end high-speed driving return the tiresto the cold inflation pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 324 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 406.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 409and Wheel Replacement on page 414 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 460.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 454.

408

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 418.

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

409

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 399 for additional information.

410

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 434.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 324,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

411

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 410 andAccessories and Modifications on page 344 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

412

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

413

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

414

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 418 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

415

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P215/60R16,P225/50R17, or P225/50R18 size tires, donot use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow that



manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has P205/65R15 sizetires, use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class S-typechains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheels with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

416

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

417

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place.Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 170for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

418

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is in the trunk orcargo area.

1. Open the trunk for sedan models. See Trunk(Sedan) on page 108 for more information.For MAXX models, open the liftgate. SeeLiftgate (MAXX) on page 110.

2. For the sedan, lift the handle on the spare tirecover. The handle may hook on the trunkfront edge weatherstrip to hold the cover outof the way. For the MAXX, lift the handleto release the latch on the spare tire cover.

3. For the MAXX, lift and remove the cover.

419

4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise andremove it. Then remove the compactspare tire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 434 for more information.

5. Remove the wing nut holding the jack inplace.

6. Remove the extension bolt (MAXX modelsand Sedan SS only) that is clipped to thejack. You will need this later to store theflat tire.

7. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from thetrunk or cargo area.

Tire Changing Tools

The tools you will be using include the wheelwrench (A) and jack (B). The MAXX and allSS models include an additional extension.

Sedan shown, MAXX Models and Sedan SS similar

420

1. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise toloosen wheel wrench.

2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.

3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench bypressing the button with your index fingerand pulling on the end of the wrench.You must do this before using the wheelwrench.

421

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. It is recommended that you do a safety check

before preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 418 for more information.

2. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcapthat has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen theplastic nut caps. You might need to usethe wheel wrench to loosen them. Do not pryoff wheel covers or center caps that haveplastic wheel nut caps.

3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap fromthe wheel to locate the wheel nuts.If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcapwithout plastic wheel nut caps, gently pry onthe edge of the plastic wheel trim to remove itfrom the wheel to locate the wheel nuts.Store the wheel cover and wheel nut caps inthe trunk until you have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

4. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.Do not remove them yet.

5. It is recommended that you do a safety checkbefore preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 418 for more information.

422

6. Position the lift head at the jack locationnearest the flat tire. Make sure all of thejack lift head is touching the jacking flangeunder the body. Do not place the jack under abody panel. The lower body panel has anarrow to aid in locating the jacking location.

7. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tirebeing changed.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

423

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough roomfor the compact spare tire to fit.

424

9. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheelnuts become loose after time. The wheel



could come off and cause an accident.When changing a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from the places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,a cloth or a paper towel can be used to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get all the rust ordirt off.

11. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

425

12. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose. Thevehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

13. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend toward the wheel. Tighten each nut byhand or with the wrench until the wheel is heldagainst the hub. 14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrench

counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

426

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 454for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specifications on page 454for the wheel nut torque specification.

15. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown, withthe wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourvehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put awheel cover on the compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

427

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (Sedan)

Storing a Flat Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the flat tire and tools in the compactspare tire compartment, do the following:

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. Jack and Wheel

Wrench

D. Flat Tire(Valve Stem down)

E. Bolt

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk (Sedan) onpage 108 for more information.

2. Remove the center cap from the wheel.

428

3. Place the tire (D) in the compartment, valvestem up, with the bolt (E) extending throughthe wheel center hole.

4. Place the jack and wheel wrench (D) over thebolt (E), inside the wheel.

5. Secure by tightening the larger wing nut (B)onto the bolt (E).

6. Reinstall the tire cover (A).

Storing the Compact Spare TireThe compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Store the compact spare tire and tools asshown in the following diagram. A. Cover

B. RetainerC. Spare TireD. Wing Nut

E. Jack and WheelWrench

F. Bolt

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 434.

429

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (Sedan SS)

{CAUTION:


Storing the Flat Tire and ToolsTo store the flat tire and jack in the compact sparetire compartment, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk (Sedan) onpage 108 for more information.

2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellowsleeve) from the jack and remove thecenter cap from the wheel.

3. Place the jack over the bolt (B) on the floor,making sure it contacts the bolt as shown.

4. With the yellow cap in place to prevent thewheel from being scratched, place the boltextension (A) onto the bolt (B).

5. Thread the small wing nut (C) until it is at ornear the end of the threads.

6. Place the flat tire in the compartment, valvestem up.

7. Reach under the wheel and lift the boltextension (A) so that the threaded end of thebolt passes through the center hole of thewheel.

430

8. Remove the yellow cap.

9. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer.

10. Re-install the cover.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Flat TireD. Wing Nut

E. Bolt ExtensionF. Jack and Wheel

WrenchG. Bolt

Storing the Compact Spare TireThe compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Store the compact spare tire and tools asshown in the following diagram.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Flat TireD. Wing Nut

E. Jack, Wheel Wrenchand Bolt Extension

F. Bolt

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 434.

431

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (All MAXX Models)

{CAUTION:


Storing the Flat Tire and ToolsTo store the flat tire and jack in the compact sparetire compartment, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate (MAXX) onpage 110 for more information.

2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellowsleeve) from the jack and remove thecenter cap from the wheel.

3. Place the jack over the bolt (B) on the floor,making sure it contacts the bolt as shown.

4. Install the bracket (D) and then the boltextension (A).

5. Secure the jack, bracket and bolt extensionwith the wing nut (C) provided.

432

6. With the valve stem up, place the tire on thecompartment floor with the rear of the tirebeneath the trim panel (tire may not laycompletely flat).

7. Make sure the bolt extension (A) passesthrough the wheel center.

8. Remove the plug from the center hole of thefloor cover by pressing on the tabs on thebottom of the cover.

9. Remove the yellow cap from the boltextension.

10. Fold the rear flap of the cover up and placethe cover on top of the wheel. The extensionwill come through the center hole in thecover.

11. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer. A. RetainerB. CoverC. Flat Tire

(Valve Stem Up)D. Nut

E. Bolt ExtensionF. BracketG. Jack and Wheel

WrenchH. Bolt

433

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand ToolsThe compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Store the compact spare tire and tools as shown inthe following diagram.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Spare TireD. Wing NutE. Bracket

F. Jack, WheelWrench and BoltExtension

G. Bolt

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 434.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air after atime. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is madeto perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so youcan finish your trip and have the full-size tirerepaired or replaced at your convenience. Ofcourse, it is best to replace the spare with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. The spare tire will lastlonger and be in good shape in case it is neededagain.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compact sparecan get caught on the rails. That can damagethe tire and wheel, and maybe other parts ofyour vehicle.

434

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle’sinterior.When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Removeany accidental over-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damage tothe integrated radio antenna and the rearwindow defogger. When cleaning the glass onyour vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

435

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

436

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

437

Ultra Lux Suede

Cleaning Ultra Lux SuedeUse a mild solution of lukewarm water and aneutral dish soap on a soft cloth or sponge. Forthe following stains, follow these instructions:

Coffee, Tea, and Milk: Blot with a clean,soft, white cloth. Then clean with mild soapy waterand a clean white cloth.

Cosmetics: Clean with mild soapy water and aclean white cloth.

Jelly, Syrup, and Fruit: Remove most of thesolids, then clean with warm tap water and a cleanwhite cloth.

Oil and Grease: Sprinkle baking soda on thespot, brush, then wipe with a clean white cloth.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

438

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 468.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 443. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and notallowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

439

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 439.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 443.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxesand polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glasscleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

440

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum WheelsNotice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

441

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle.This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.Although no defect in the paint job causes this, wewill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

442

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches andother light surfacecontamination.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andsuede upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odoreliminator used onfabrics, vinyl, suede andcarpet.

443

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)• Model designation• Paint information• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

444

Electrical SystemAdd-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage yourvehicle and the damage would not be coveredby your warranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep other components fromworking as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 88.

See Towing a Trailer on page 333 for moreinformation about add-on electrical equipment andtowing a vehicle.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in thefuse block. An electrical overload will causethe lamps to turn off. If this happens, have yourheadlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

445

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsThe power window motors are protected by a circuitbreaker in the motor, and a fuse in the fuse panel.If the motor overheats due to a heavy load thewindow will stop until the motor cools. When thecurrent load is too heavy the fuse will open,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by fuses and fusible thermallinks in the wiring itself.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’thave a spare fuse, you can borrow one thathas the same amperage. Just pick a feature ofyour vehicle that you can get along without — likethe radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can.

There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one inthe center of the instrument panel, one in theengine compartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located on the instrumentpanel fuse block. It can be used to easily removefuses from the fuse block.

446

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located at on the lower front side of the console, on the passenger side ofthe vehicle. To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door by pulling out.To reinstall the door, insert the hooks at the front end first, then push the door into the console panel tosecure it.

Fuses UsagePOWERMIRRORS Power Mirrors

EPS Electric Power Steering

Fuses Usage

RUN/CRANKCruise Control, Electronic RangeSelect, Driver Shift Control,Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

447

Fuses UsageHVACBLOWER HIGH(Relay)

Climate Control System

CLUSTER/THEFT

Instrument Panel Cluster, TheftDeterrent System

ONSTAR OnStar® SystemNOTINSTALLED Not Used

AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag SystemHVAC CTRL(BATT) Climate Control System

PEDAL Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalWIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer SwitchIGN SENSOR Ignition SwitchSTR/WHLILLUM

Steering Wheel ControlsBacklighting

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

RADIO Audio SystemINTERIORLIGHTS

Overhead Lighting, Trunk/CargoLighting

REAR WIPER Rear Wiper System/Washer PumpHVAC CTRL(IGN) Climate Control System

Fuses UsageHVACBLOWER Climate Control System

DOOR LOCK Automatic Door Lock System

ROOF/HEATSEAT

Sunroof, Heated Seats, AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror, Compass,Rear Wiper/Washer System

POWERWINDOWS Power Window Switch



AIRBAG(BATT) Airbag System

FUSE PULLER Fuse PullerSPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare

SPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare



448

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 354 for more information on location.

Fuses Usage

1 Air Conditioning Clutch

2 Electronic Throttle Control

Fuses Usage

3 Engine Control Module (IGN 1) (V6)

4 Transmission

449

Fuses Usage

6 Emission 1

7 Left Headlamp Low-Beam

8 Horn

9 Right Headlamp Low-Beam

10 Front Fog Lamps

11 Left Headlamp High-Beam

12 Right Headlamp High-Beam

13 Engine Control Module (BATT) (L4)

14 Windshield Wiper

15 Anti-lock Brake System

16 Engine Control Module (IGN 1) (L4)

17 Cooling Fan 1

18 Cooling Fan 2

19 Run Relay

20 IBCM 1

21 IBCM (R/C)

22 Rear Electrical Center 1

23 Rear Electrical Center 2

24 Anti-lock Brake System

Fuses Usage

25 IBCM 2

26 Starter

27 (DIODE) Windshield Wiper

41 Electric Power Steering

42 Transaxle Control Module

43 Ignition Module

44 Fuel Injectors

45 Rear Oxygen Sensors

46 (Resistor) Brake Lamp Diagnostic

47 Daytime Running Lamps

51 Engine Control Module (BATT) (V6)

Relays Usage

28 Cooling Fan 1

29 Cooling Fan Mode Series/Parallel

30 Cooling Fan 2

31 Starter

32 Run/Crank Ignition

33 Powertrain

450

Relays Usage

34 Air Conditioning Clutch

35 High-Beam Headlamps

36 Front Fog Lamps

37 Horn

38 Low-Beam Headlamps

39 Windshield Wiper 1

40 Windshield Wiper 2

48 Daytime Running Lamps

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

The rear compartment fuse block is located in thetrunk of the vehicle. Access the fuse blockthrough the trunk panel on the driver’s side of therear cargo area.

451

Fuses Usage

1 Not Used

2 Driver Seat Controls

3 Not Used

Fuses Usage

4 Not Used

5 Emission

6 Parklamps

452

Fuses Usage

7 Not Used

8 Not Used

9 Not Used

10 Sunroof Controls

11 Not Used

12 Auxiliary Power 2

13 Not Used

14 Heated Seat Controls

15 Not Used

16Remote Keyless Entry System,XM Satellite Radio, Rear SeatEntertainment System, Homelink

17 Back-up Lamps

18 Not Used

19 Not Used

20 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary PowerOutlet

21 Not Used

22 Trunk

Fuses Usage

23 Rear Window Defogger

24 Heated Mirror Controls

25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage

26 Rear Window Defogger

27 Parklamps

28 Not Used

29 Not Used

30 Not Used

31 Not Used

32 Not Used

33 Back-up Lamps

34 Not Used

35 Not Used

36 Trunk

37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Trunk, Cargo Lamps

453

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer toRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 468 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transaxle Complete Overhaul

Automatic Transaxle 4T45-E 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Automatic Transaxle 4T65-E 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Cooling System

2.2L L4 Engine 7.5 qt 7.1 L

3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 9.7 qt 9.2 L

Engine Oil with Filter

2.2L L4 Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L

3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 4.0 qt 3.8 L

454

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank

Sedan 16.1 gal 61.1 L

Malibu Maxx 16.3 gal 61.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.2L L4 F Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.5L V6 N Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.9L V6 1 Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

455

✍ NOTES

456

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 458Introduction ............................................... 458Maintenance Requirements ........................ 458Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 458Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 458Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 460Additional Required Services ..................... 462Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 463

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 464At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 464At Least Once a Month ............................. 465At Least Once a Year ............................... 466Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 468Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 469Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 470Maintenance Record .................................. 472

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

457

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of theair we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keepyour vehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive itto work, to do errands, or in many other ways.

458

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 324.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaceswithin legal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 346.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 460 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 462and Maintenance Footnotes on page 463 forfurther information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment for thejob. If you have any doubt, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer to have aqualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 492.

459

Owner Checks and Services on page 464 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricantsto use are listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 468 and Normal MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 469. When yourvehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. Allparts should be replaced and all necessary repairsdone before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.We recommend the use of genuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it meansthat service is required for your vehicle. Have yourvehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the engine oil lifesystem may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine parts and resetthe system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 362 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your first servicebe Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if themessage comes on within 10 months since thevehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

460

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 359. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 362. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 364. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 408 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 465.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •3.9L Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluidas needed. •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

461

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 364. • • •

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter (severe service only).See footnote (h).

• • •

Replace spark plugs. Inspect sparkplug wires (V6 only). An EmissionControl Service.

•

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (l).

•

462

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect electric powersteering cables for proper hook-up, binding,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect hydraulic powersteering lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replace wiper bladesthat are worn or damaged. See Windshield Wiper

Blade Replacement on page 394 and Windshieldand Wiper Blades on page 440 for moreinformation.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light andall your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lidhinges and latches. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

463

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police,

or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not requirechanging.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer/retailer perform this service. SeeEngine Coolant on page 368 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap, and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 468.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

464

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 359 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engineoil regularly and keep it at the properlevel. Failure to keep the engine oil at theproper level can cause damage to the enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 368 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they areinflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget tocheck the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 406. Check to make sure the spare tireis stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 418.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil LifeSystem service notification. Check the tires forwear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation on page 408.

465

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 132.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 132.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

466

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

467

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.To determine the proper viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 359.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 368.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluidor equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

HydraulicPower Steering

System(if equipped)

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

468

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour GM dealer.

Part Part Numbers ACDelco®

Part Numbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25099149 A1208 C

Engine Oil Filter

2.2L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 89017342 PF61

Spark Plugs

2.2L L4 Engine 12598004 41-103

3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 12591131 41-100

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm) 22688087 —

Passenger’s Side – 19.6 inches (50.0 cm) 22688086 —

Rear – 18 inches (46.7 cm) 10392621* —

*Wiper blade and assembly

469

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.2L L4 Engine

3.5L V6 Engine

470

3.9L V6 MAXX Engine

471

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 458.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 464 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

472

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



473

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



474

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 476Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 476Online Owner Center ................................. 478Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 479Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 479GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 480Roadside Assistance Program ................... 481Courtesy Transportation ............................. 483Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 486Collision Damage Repair ........................... 487

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 491Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 491Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 491Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 492Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 492

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

475

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation ofyour vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s salesor service departments. Sometimes, however,despite the best intentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If your concernhas not been resolved to your satisfaction, thefollowing steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership without furtherhelp, in the U.S., contact the Chevrolet CustomerAssistance Center by calling 1-800-222-1020.In Canada, contact General Motors of Canada

Customer Communication Centre by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854(French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is

available from the vehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of the instrument paneland visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

(kilometers).When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with your newvehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

476

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

477

For further information concerning eligibilityin the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or youmay write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied byyour Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for yourGM ownership needs. Specific vehicleinformation can be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for servicenationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

478

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save informationon vehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each of yourpreferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools andforms with greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

479

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such as hand controlsor a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

480

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872).

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle,you are automatically enrolled in theChevrolet Roadside Assistance program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consentof the owner is not eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,up to a maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in Canada). Service to

provide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternative fuelswill not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present personal identificationbefore lock-out service is provided. In Canada,the vehicle registration is also required.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.A remote unlock may be available if you havean active OnStar® subscription.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest dealershipfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated, is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be coveredat no charge.

481

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America,along with helpful travel information pertainingto your trip.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it is best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en routeand over 250 kilometres from original point ofdeparture, you may qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to amaximum of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals(maximum of $50/day), (B) lodging (maximumof $100/night) and (C) alternate groundtransportation (maximum of $40/day).

This benefit is to assist you with some of theunplanned expense you may incur whilewaiting for your vehicle to be repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim fortrip interruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Theremay be times, when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance, your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursedup to $100 upon submission of the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

482

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency ortype of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program fornew vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.

483

Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable towait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenienceby providing several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

484

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs andbe supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicleis kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rentalvehicle provider requirements. Requirements

vary and may include minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You areresponsible for fuel usage charges and may alsobe responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to theterms and conditions described herein at itssole discretion.

485

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computersystems that monitor and control severalaspects of the vehicle’s performance. Yourvehicle uses on-board vehicle computersto monitor emission control components tooptimize fuel economy, to monitor conditionsfor airbag deployment and, if the vehiclehas the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), toprovide anti-lock braking and to help thedriver control the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations. Some information may be storedduring regular operations to facilitate repairof detected malfunctions; other informationis stored only in a crash event by computersystems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information aboutthe condition of the vehicle and how it wasoperated, such as data related to engine speed,

brake application, throttle position, vehiclespeed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness,airbag performance, and the severity of acollision. This information has been used toimprove vehicle crash performance and maybe used to improve crash performance of futurevehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipmentis needed and access to the vehicle orthe device that stores the data is required.GM will not access information about a crashevent or share it with others other than:• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with the consentof the lessee,

• in response to an official request of policeor similar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process, or

• as required by law.

486

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:• use the data for GM research needs,• make it available for research where

appropriate confidentiality is to bemaintained and need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tiedto a specific vehicle with non-GMorganizations for research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can readthe information if they have access to thevehicle or the device that stores the data.If your vehicle has OnStar®, please checkthe OnStar® subscription service agreementor owner manual for information on itsoperations and data collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’s resale value,and safety performance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new partsmade with the same materials and constructionmethods as the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts canhelp maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may alsobe used for repair. These parts are typicallyremoved from vehicles that were total lossesin prior accidents. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sections of thevehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,may be an acceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designed appearance andsafety performance, however, the history of theseparts is not known. Such parts are not coveredby your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty,and any related failures are not covered bythat warranty.

487

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GMand may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, and maynot perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by yourGM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyvehicle failure related to such parts are notcovered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurancepolicy terms. Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is not available fromyour current insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

488

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved inan accident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sureyou are all right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else in your vehicle,or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accidentuntil all matters have been taken care of.Move your vehicle only if its position putsyou in danger or you are instructed to moveit by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 481 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or writedown the driver’s name, the service’s name,and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items inyour vehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general descriptionof the damage to the other vehicle.

489

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walkyou through the information they will need.If they ask for a police report, phone or goto the police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collision repair facility to fixthe damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facilitythat any required replacement collisionparts be original equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but youmust live with the repair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurance company may initiallyvalue the repair using aftermarket parts. Discussthis with your repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

490

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer/retailer,or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

491

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletincontains instructions to assist in the diagnosisand service of your vehicle.

492

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your General Motorsdealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US+ Processing Fee

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specificallyfor owners and intended to provide basicoperational information about the vehicle.The owner manual includes the MaintenanceSchedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.


Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.


Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specify year andmodel name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed pricesare quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residentsare to make checks payable in U.S. funds.

493

✍ NOTES

494

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 344Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 89Additives, Fuel ............................................ 347Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 445Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 121Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 364Air Conditioning .................................. 188, 192Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 203Readiness Light ....................................... 202

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 486

Airbag System ............................................... 72What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 80When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 78Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 74

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 89How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 79Passenger Sensing System ....................... 82

Airbag Systems (cont.)Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 88What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 79

Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 286Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 285Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 286Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 293Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 208Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 441Care of Safety Belts ................................ 439Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 442Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 440Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 435Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 436Finish Care .............................................. 440Finish Damage ......................................... 442Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 438Leather .................................................... 437Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 442Tires ........................................................ 441Ultra Lux Suede ....................................... 438Underbody Maintenance ........................... 442Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 443

495

Appearance Care (cont.)Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 439Weatherstrips ........................................... 439Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 440

Audio System .............................................. 228Audio Steering Wheel Controls ........ 282, 283Backglass Antenna ................................... 286Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 285Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 285Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 285Radio with CD ................................ 230, 236Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 246Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................... 278, 280Setting the Time with Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 230Setting the Time without Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 229Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 281Understanding Radio Reception ............... 284XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 286

Automatic Climate Control System ............... 192Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 183Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ............................................... 365, 366Operation ........................................ 124, 128

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 286Battery ........................................................ 384

Run-Down Protection ............................... 186Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 313Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 295Parking .................................................... 132

Brakes ........................................................ 381System Warning Light .............................. 206

Braking ....................................................... 292Braking in Emergencies ............................... 295Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 117Bulb Replacement ....................................... 389

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 389Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ..................................... 390License Plate Lamps ................................ 393Replacement Bulbs .................................. 394Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 392Buying New Tires ........................................ 410

496

CCalibration .......................................... 139, 141California Fuel ............................................. 347California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 345Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 454Carbon Monoxide .............. 108, 136, 317, 333Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 439Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 285Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 285

Cargo Lamp ................................................ 186Center Console Storage Area ...................... 160Chains, Tire ................................................. 416Charging System Light ................................ 206Check

Engine Light ............................................ 212Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 352Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 442Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 45Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children .................................................. 56Older Children ........................................... 42

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 65Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 67Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 187Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 441Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 440Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 436Finish Care .............................................. 440Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 435Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 438Leather .................................................... 437Tires ........................................................ 441Ultra Lux Suede ....................................... 438Underbody Maintenance ........................... 442Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 439Weatherstrips ........................................... 439Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 440

Climate Control System ............................... 188Automatic ................................................. 192Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 197

497

ClockRadios with Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 230Radios without Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 229Collision Damage Repair ............................. 487Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 37Compact Spare Tire .................................... 434Compass ............................................ 139, 141Competitive Driving ..................................... 305Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 113Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 292Convenience Net ......................................... 163Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 211Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 211Heater, Engine ......................................... 122Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 371

Cooling System ........................................... 374Cruise Control ............................................. 176Cruise Control Light .................................... 216Cupholder(s) ................................................ 160Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 483Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 479

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Customer Assistance Offices .................... 479Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 476GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 480Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 492Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 491Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 491Roadside Assistance Program .................. 481Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 492

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 182Defensive Driving ........................................ 288Delayed Headlamps .................................... 182Delayed Locking .......................................... 106Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 345Dome Lamp ................................................ 184Door

Delayed Locking ...................................... 106Door Ajar Reminder ................................. 105

498

Door (cont.)Locks ....................................................... 104Power Door Locks ................................... 105Programmable Automatic

Door Locks ........................................... 106Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 107

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 218DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 218DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 225DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 222

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 306City .......................................................... 311Defensive ................................................. 288Drunken ................................................... 289Freeway ................................................... 312Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 315In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 307Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 323Winter ...................................................... 317

DVDRear Seat Entertainment System ............. 261

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 445Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 449Fuses ...................................................... 446Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 445Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 447Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 446Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 451Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 445

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 364Check and Service Engine Soon Light ...... 212Coolant .................................................... 368Coolant Heater ......................................... 122Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 211Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 211Drive Belt Routing .................................... 470Engine Compartment Overview ................ 354Exhaust ................................................... 136Oil ........................................................... 359Oil Life System ........................................ 362

499

Engine (cont.)Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 373Overheating ............................................. 371Running While Parked ............................. 137Starting .................................................... 120

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 297Active Light .............................................. 210Warning Light ........................................... 210

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 185Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 486Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 41Exterior Lamps ............................................ 179

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 364Finish Damage ............................................ 442Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 285Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 170Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 173Flat Tire ...................................................... 417Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 418

Flat Tire, Storing ........................ 428, 430, 432Fluid

Power Steering ........................................ 379Windshield Washer .................................. 380

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 184

Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14Front Reading Lamps .................................. 185Fuel ............................................................ 346

Additives .................................................. 347California Fuel .......................................... 347Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 351Filling Your Tank ...................................... 349Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 348Gage ....................................................... 217Gasoline Octane ...................................... 346Gasoline Specifications ............................ 347

Fuses .......................................................... 446Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 449Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 447Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 451Windshield Wiper ..................................... 445

500

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 211Fuel ......................................................... 217Speedometer ........................................... 200Tachometer .............................................. 201

Garage Door Opener ................................... 149Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 346Specifications ........................................... 347

Glove Box ................................................... 160GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 480

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 170Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 445Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 389Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 182Delayed ................................................... 182Exterior Lamps ......................................... 179Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 173

Headlamps (cont.)Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 389Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ..................................... 390High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 172On Reminder ........................................... 181

Headlamps Off in Park (P) .......................... 181Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ................................................ 188, 192Highbeam On Light ..................................... 216High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 407Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 314Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 315Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 352Release ................................................... 352

Horn ............................................................ 170How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 118Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 45Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 406

501

Instrument PanelOverview .................................................. 168

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 184Cluster ..................................................... 198

JJump Starting .............................................. 385

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 96Keys ............................................................. 95

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 399Lamps

Cargo ...................................................... 186Dome ....................................................... 184Front Reading .......................................... 185Rear Reading .......................................... 185Trunk ....................................................... 185

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 56

License Plate Lamps ................................... 393Lift Seat, Power ............................................ 16Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ..................................... 110Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 202Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 208Brake System Warning ............................. 206Charging System ..................................... 206Cruise Control .......................................... 216Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 211Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light .......................................... 210Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 210Highbeam On .......................................... 216Malfunction Indicator ................................ 212Oil Pressure ............................................. 215Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 203Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 202Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 201Security ................................................... 216

502

Light (cont.)TCS Warning Light .................................. 209Traction Control System Active ................. 209Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning ................................................ 209Lighting

Entry/Exit ................................................. 185Parade Dimming ...................................... 185

LightsExterior Lamps ......................................... 179Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 173High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 172On Reminder ........................................... 181

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 324Lockout Protection ....................................... 108Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 106Door ........................................................ 104Lockout Protection ................................... 108Power Door ............................................. 105Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 106Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 107

Loss of Control ........................................... 304Lumbar

Manual Controls .......................................... 9

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 462At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 464At Least Once a Month ............................ 465At Least Once a Year .............................. 466Introduction .............................................. 458Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 463Maintenance Record ................................ 472Maintenance Requirements ...................... 458Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 469Owner Checks and Services .................... 464Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 468Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 460Using ....................................................... 458Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 458

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 212Manual Lumbar Controls ................................. 9Manual Seats .................................................. 8Map Pocket ................................................. 161Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 222

503

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview with

Compass .............................................. 141Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® and Compass ......................... 139Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 138Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 138Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 144Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................. 143Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 143

MyGMLink.com ............................................ 478

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 117Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 469

OOdometer .................................................... 200Odometer, Trip ............................................ 200Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 302Oil

Engine ..................................................... 359Pressure Light .......................................... 215

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 362Older Children, Restraints ............................. 42Online Owner Center ................................... 478OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 144Operation, Universal Home Remote

System ............................................ 149, 153Other Warning Devices ................................ 170Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 197Outlets

Accessory Power ..................................... 186Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 144Power Heated Mirrors .............................. 143Power Mirrors .......................................... 143

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 373

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 464Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 442Parade Dimming .......................................... 185Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 132Shifting Out of ......................................... 134

504

Park (P) Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............ 181Parking

Brake ....................................................... 132Over Things That Burn ............................ 135

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 203Passenger Sensing System ........................... 82Passing ....................................................... 302PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 115PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 115Power

Door Locks .............................................. 105Electrical System ..................................... 446Lift Seat ..................................................... 16Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 119Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 379Windows .................................................. 111

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 41Privacy ........................................................ 486Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 106

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 24

RRadios ........................................................ 228

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 285Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 285Radio with CD ................................ 230, 236Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 246Rear Seat Audio ............................. 278, 280Setting the Time with Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 230Setting the Time without Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 229Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 281Understanding Reception ......................... 284

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..... 161Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 107Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 185Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 37Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 278, 280Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 261Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 17Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 34Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 175Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass ................................................. 141

505

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withOnStar® and Compass ............................. 139

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 138Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 138Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 468Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 330Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 97Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 422Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 419Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 394Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 491General Motors ........................................ 492United States Government ....................... 491

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 91Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 119Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 34

RoadsideAssistance Program ................................. 481

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 323Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 470Running the Engine While Parked ............... 137

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 202Pretensioners ............................................. 41Reminder Light ........................................ 201

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 439Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 37Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 34Right Front Passenger Position .................. 34Safety Belt Extender .................................. 41Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 34Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 33

506

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 460Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual ........................................................ 8Manual Lumbar ............................................ 9Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14Power Lift Seat .......................................... 16Power Seat ................................................. 9Rear Seat Operation .................................. 17Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 65Right Front Seat Position ........................... 67

Security Light .............................................. 216Service ........................................................ 344

Accessories and Modifications .................. 344Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 346California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 345Doing Your Own Work ............................. 345Engine Soon Light ................................... 212Publications Ordering Information ............. 492

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 88Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 442Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 132Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 134Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 33Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 172Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 434Installing .................................................. 422Removing ................................................ 419Storing ................................... 428, 430, 432

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 454Speedometer ............................................... 200Starting Your Engine ................................... 120Steering ...................................................... 299Steering Wheel Controls, Audio .......... 282, 283Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 160Convenience Net ..................................... 163Cupholder(s) ............................................ 160Glove Box ................................................ 160Map Pocket ............................................. 161Rear Compartment Storage

Panel/Cover .......................................... 161Table ....................................................... 163

507

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 322Sun Visors .................................................. 112Sunroof ....................................................... 164System Identification, Universal Home

Remote System ....................................... 148

TTable ........................................................... 163Tachometer ................................................. 201Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 392

TCS Active Light ......................................... 209TCS Warning Light ...................................... 209Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 281Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 113

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 113PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 115PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 115

Time SettingRadios with Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 230Radios without Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 229

Tires ........................................................... 397Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 441Buying New Tires ..................................... 410Chains ..................................................... 416Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 418Cleaning .................................................. 441Compact Spare Tire ................................. 434Different Size ........................................... 412High-Speed Operation .............................. 407If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 417Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 406Inspection and Rotation ............................ 408Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 422Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 422Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 419Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and Tools ............................ 428, 430, 432Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 399Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 403Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 412Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 414Wheel Replacement ................................. 414When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 409Winter Tires ............................................. 398

508

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 330Towing a Trailer ....................................... 333Your Vehicle ............................................. 330

TractionControl System Active Light ..................... 209Control System (TCS) .............................. 295Control System Warning Light .................. 209Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 297Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light .......................................... 210Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 210Trip Odometer ............................................. 200Trunk .......................................................... 108Trunk Lamps ............................................... 185Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 172Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 171

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 284Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 412Universal Home Remote System ................. 149

Operation ........................................ 149, 153System Identification ................................ 148

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 292Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 324Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders ........................................ 486

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 444Service Parts Identification Label .............. 444

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 225

Vehicle Privacy ............................................ 486Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 197Visors .......................................................... 112

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 198Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 222Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 170Other Warning Devices ............................ 170Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

509

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 414Different Size ........................................... 412Replacement ............................................ 414

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54Windows ..................................................... 110

Power ...................................................... 111Windshield

Washer .................................................... 174Washer Fluid ........................................... 380Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 394Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 440Wiper Fuses ............................................ 445Wipers ..................................................... 173

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 175Winter Driving ............................................. 317Winter Tires ................................................. 398

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 259XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 286

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 458

510

2007 chevrolet malibu owner manual m - general motors …€¦ · 2007 chevrolet malibu owner...

Documents